JP7125135B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a conventional game machine, various effects are provided on the game board, and the effects are used to enhance the interest in the game.
As such effect means, there is one that includes movable effect means (so-called gimmick) and operates the movable effect means (so-called gimmick) in a predetermined operation mode (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-236681 A

However, there is room for improvement in terms of accurately activating the movable effect means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to appropriately operate movable effect means in view of such circumstances.

In order to solve such problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of controlling a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect corresponding to a signal from the main control means. effect control means and a plurality of movable effect means having different operation modes, the main control means is capable of transmitting a predetermined signal based on the start of power supply, The effect control means is capable of controlling the initial actions of the plurality of movable effect means based on the reception of the predetermined signal, and controlling the effect operations of the plurality of movable effect means during game execution. A specific movable effect means among the plurality of movable effect means is capable of executing, as the effect operation, a notification effect operation for notifying that a special game advantageous to the player is provided, and The performance action has a longer time to move from the specific motion position to the initial position than the time to move from the initial position to the specific motion position, and in the initial motion, the plurality of movable presentation means are sequentially moved. A game standby screen in which a plurality of performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination on a predetermined display means in a standby state in which the specific movable effect means is operated at the end of the initial motion and the game is not in progress. While the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the game standby screen is displayed, if the power supply to the effect control means continues, the game standby screen It is possible to continue the display, and when the effect control means receives the predetermined signal while continuing the display of the game standby screen, the initial operation can be executed, and the It is characterized in that it is possible to display the plurality of effect symbols in a specific combination different from the predetermined combination on the game standby screen .

According to the present invention, it is possible to accurately operate the movable effect means.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. (a) is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing in the integrated control unit, and (b) is a diagram showing V-blank interrupt processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows the role object production|presentation setting process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the role product production|presentation execution processing in a lamp/driving control part. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modification of the specific example (FIG. 38) in which various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for RWM clear; FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a modification of the specific example (FIG. 41) in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting power supply only to the main control board after stopping; It is a figure which shows the modification in the case of restarting after stopping only the power supply to a main-control board. It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the initial operation mode of a 1st movable member, and the specific example of required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation operation|movement aspect of a 1st movable member, and required time. It is a figure which shows the initial operation|movement aspect of a 2nd movable member, and the specific example of required time. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation operation|movement aspect of a 2nd movable member, and required time. It is a figure which shows the comparison of an initial stage operation mode and an effect operation mode. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation operation|movement aspect of a 1st movable member at the time of a big-hit alert. It is a figure which shows the modification of the required time of an initial stage operation mode, and the required time of an effect|presentation operation mode. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of an initial stage operation mode and an effect operation mode. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of an initial stage operation mode and an effect operation mode. It is a figure which shows the comparison in the production|presentation scene of a 1st movable member and a 2nd movable member. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the initial motion and production|presentation motion in each movable member of a board accessory. It is a diagram showing a comparison between the initial motion and the production motion in each movable member of the frame role. It is a diagram showing a modification of the board accessory initial motion pattern associated with the effect motion. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting the power supply to the main control board after stopping;

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper receiving tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower receiving tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to enter the upper receiving tray 11, and game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper receiving tray 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper receiving tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, a production button 17 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later are left and right. are placed side by side.

The production button 17 includes a production button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 3) that detects an operation on the production button 17, and a production button 17. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 3) is provided to drive the game machine 1 so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1. FIG.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting (lighting) the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. , by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is a part of the button drive device 17b, moving in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above, and/or the button The driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode to perform a performance operation. is detected.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 3) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

A lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper receiving tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls. is performed, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper receiving tray 11 and the lower receiving tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper receiving tray 11 and guiding them to the lower receiving tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 3) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 3), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 3) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. It is By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a game ball shooting device 26 (not shown) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, A lock mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The game ball shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 (not shown) for shooting game balls, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) for driving the hitting member 28, A shooting rail 29 (not shown) that is inclined upward toward the end and a stopper 30 (not shown) that stops the game ball A at the shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which a game ball can always win a prize (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. 43 is detected by a general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 3), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The balls are put out to the upper tray 11 as balls.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 3), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 3), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper receiving tray as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 3), a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that converts (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that opens and closes. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 3) is provided for this purpose. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is designed to be dispensed onto the upper receiving tray 11 . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal pattern gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 3), a large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the large winning opening opening/closing member 51. is provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls to the upper tray. 11 will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) is provided for receiving and collecting game balls detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a and allowing them to flow down.

Also, in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 3) is provided for detecting game balls flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a is used to re-detect game balls after being detected by the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the big winning opening detecting switch 50a. It is used to determine whether it was a proper winning (ball winning) or an abnormal winning (ball winning).

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, And, a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 3) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) or during a time saving game A main information display device 59 consisting of a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 3) is provided for prompting shooting of a game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a during the state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is used to display (notify) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is obtained by acquiring a random number for judging a big hit (judgment information) when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot lottery is obtained by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second start port 47, and acquiring the jackpot judgment random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. It should be noted that when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which the right to execute has been acquired. The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 10 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 (first special symbol It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol) is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when a jackpot lottery with a special pattern is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed).

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery with the second special symbol. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED flashes (variable display) at a predetermined interval, and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up in the case of a big hit, loses) in the case of ) is displayed as stopped.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories. It consists of two LEDs. When the number of reserved memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved memories is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the number of reserved memories is "2". When , the left and right LEDs light up, when the number of reserved memories is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved memories is "4", the left and right LEDs blink. .

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, and light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the normal pattern reservation When the memory number is "2", the left and right LEDs light up. , the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, there are a customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbols. be.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronization with). That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a reach production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big winning lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four types of ready-to-win effects: "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full rotation ready-to-win effects".

"Normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is displayed in the central area. It is a ready-to-win production that is executed in a state in which a variable ready-to-win state is formed.

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) It is a reach effect in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) flows.

"SPSP reach production" means that after the normal reach production or the SP reach production, a development production (see Fig. 62) is performed, and it is executed after the development production, and the production effect (expectation to be a big hit) is more effective than the normal reach production or the SP reach production. It is a reach effect in which movies (videos, animations, etc.) with high (high) flow.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1), which is the number of the current first reserved memory, is displayed. 1st pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2) which is the number of the current second pending storage Then, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed (see FIG. 47).

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C (each Reference numerals are omitted), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed in each of the display portions 70B1 to 70B4. That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C (each The symbols are not shown), and the second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed in each of the display portions 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 3), moves vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned above and the production position positioned below. It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 3), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 3), moves vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned below and the production position positioned above. A second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.
In addition, the second movable member 74 has a rotating body 74a on its back surface. It is rotatable.
In addition, although the "rotating body 74a" is mentioned as an example, it may be provided with a member that performs other operations (for example, projection) without being limited to rotation.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.
Further, for example, if the second movable member 74 is arranged on the back side (Z direction) of the first movable member 73 (the arrangement may be reversed) so that they do not collide with each other, the first movable member 73 and the first movable member 73 can be arranged. The two movable members 74 may be operated simultaneously.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for putting out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island facilities, etc. A game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores game balls to be supplied and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main controller 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110 A production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production in response to and a power supply device 160A (not shown) incorporating a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 3) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), variable winning portion 49 (large winning port 50, large winning port detection switch 50a, large winning port opening/closing member 51 , a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) is provided.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window portion for allowing the rear side to be visually recognized. , movable effect devices (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. 130 A of production control devices are provided in the rear side of the 1st image display device 70, and 110 A of main control devices are provided under 130A of production control devices. In addition, below, the movable effect device (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) may be referred to as a board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74).

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program, etc., and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a big winning opening detection switch 50a. , winning confirmation detection switch 52a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special Design reservation display 63, second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing relating to the payout of game balls, thereby providing a game ball payout device. 100, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. etc. are connected, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 .

When receiving a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control a predetermined number of game balls to be put out. When it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have been put out, control for putting out game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display/sound control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button driving device 17b, and board A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76, the board driving device 75, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/driving control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 147, an audio controller 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143 in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design. , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). , the drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it outputs to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

General-purpose controllers for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting them are provided between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device with XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/driving control section. 130m (sub CPU 130a) based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted, lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 It also controls driving of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75 .

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the production control board 130 and various electronic parts). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low-probability gaming state" and a "high-probability gaming state" as states relating to the jackpot lottery of special symbols, and as a state relating to the second starting port opening/closing member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47, It has a "non-time-saving gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state."

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-short-time gaming state” (2) A low-probability short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” (3) “ High probability game state "and" time saving game state "high probability time saving game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state ” will be called. In addition, in the present embodiment, "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. .

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, A game state in which the winning probability is set as low as, for example, 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/59.8, for example. . Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, there are set values in four stages consisting of set value 1 to set value 4, and depending on each stage, the winning probability of the jackpot in the "low probability gaming state", the "high probability The odds of winning the jackpot in the "game state" are different. For example, if the probability of winning the jackpot is set to a value of 1, at a set value of 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the "low-probability gaming state" is, for example, 1/256. The winning probability is, for example, 1/46. Although the values of set value 2 and set value 3 are omitted, they are set so that the probability of winning a jackpot increases step by step from set value 1. In terms of the degree of advantage, set value 1 < set value 2 <Set value 3<Set value 4 is established.

In this embodiment, the big hit that triggers the transition to the high probability game state is called "probability variable big hit". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal pattern hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled in an open state for 0.18 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result A game state set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and set longer than the "non-time-saving game state", for example, 2 seconds for the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning a prize. . Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. /128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "second jackpot game" 3 jackpot games", and "first jackpot game" and "second jackpot game" are provided as types of jackpot games that can be won in a jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 47. is doing.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is closed for 2 seconds after the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

"Second jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot games is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. In addition, the opening time of the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 is set to 29 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29 seconds, and the round The opening time may vary depending on the game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, as the type of winning game that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, "first winning game" and "second winning game", If the winning lottery is executed in a non-time-saving game state, it becomes a "first winning game", and if the winning lottery is executed in a time-saving game state, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 up to 0.18 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the second starting port opening/closing member 48 is opened once.

"Second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2 seconds, closed for 1.5 seconds, and opened again for 2 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the second opening/closing member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the second starting port 47 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can enjoy the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of special symbols as described later, and the table is stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a jackpot determination result, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), a random number for reach determination, and a special symbol The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" defines at least the determination result of the big hit and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when a big win is made, the ready-to-win game is always performed. It should be noted that the reach determination random number, the random number range is set to 97 (0-96), the special figure fluctuation random number, the random number range is set to 100 (0-99).

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 4, the variation pattern (1) (normal variation ) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of the variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). For example, the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (1) (normal variation) is set to 12 seconds, and the variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to 3 seconds. Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol to be stopped, the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2). ), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern designation command) is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", the command for specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 60 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is shown, and the MODE data is When it is "E7H", it indicates a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display 61 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47. - 特許庁

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect contents such as the effect pattern 70a are determined based on the special symbol variation pattern (special figure variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 4, the contents of the production such as the production pattern 70a are described as a reference.

Here, "normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" as the content of the production mean that the plurality of production patterns 70a fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching the ready-to-win state. The shortened variation is different in that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation. Note that the normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, and full rotation reach are as described above, and thus descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" means "the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed", and the "pseudo continuous notice" is the effect It means a notice by a variation mode in which the pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the performance pattern 70a is changed and temporarily stopped a plurality of times.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming set values based on setting confirmation operation, and initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) provided in board unit 500 drive source initial operation processing, etc. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the game ball shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the setting value (probability of judging a big hit in judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is not within the proper range , the process proceeds to step S22.

The "set value (playing) area" is an area in which set values are saved when not in the setting change mode, and is an area in which fixed set values are saved. The set value range in the set value (in-game) area is "1 to 4", which is a value obtained by adding +1 to the set value in the set value (in-game) area.
The "set value (changed) area" is an area in which the set value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (during change) area is 0 to 3, which is a value minus 1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area.
Note that the term "set value area" simply means "set value (playing) area" and "set value (changing) area".

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Notify of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program). Specifically, various driving sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are operated for a predetermined period of time. Processing for initial operation is performed over the period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Illumination device 10 for disk and illumination device 76 for disk are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, white) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) are initially operated for a predetermined period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value (in-game) area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the setting was being changed, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not progress in a state where the setting value not intended by the game parlor side is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, and second image display are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 71, the frame illumination device 10, and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize something. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, unrecoverable error processing is executed. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The “setting change notification” means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or The device 76 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the setting is being changed. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 76, and the voice output device 9, thereby grasping that the setting is being changed. becomes possible.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the set value in the set value (in-game) area and saves it in the set value (in-change) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the set value (in-game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is not within the proper range. If so, the process moves to step S19-7.

If it is determined in step S19-6 that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is not within the proper range, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area to the initial value " 0”.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-8. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-10, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value in the set value (under change) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated setting value is "4" which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), a process of correcting the setting value to "0" is performed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a increments the set value in the set value (changed) area by 1 and saves it in the set value (in game) area, and in step S19-15 sets the set value (changed) area. Initialize the value (clear to 0).

At step S19-16, the main CPU 110a terminates the display of the set values on the information display 113, and at step S19-17 terminates the display of the status confirmation display 68, thereby terminating the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk operates the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the frame illumination on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. By checking the device 10 and the board lighting device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It's becoming That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation operation may be performed by turning the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, or by turning the dedicated switch OFF. Alternatively, the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. , the detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state. It may be set to ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set values) in the RWM area for the game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

Although the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear designation command. Alternatively, instead of the power-on designation command, an RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clearing end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clearing process, or may be transmitted after the RWM clearing process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S28-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting confirmation is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. FIG. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is lit. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68 .

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S28-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

"Notification of setting confirmation" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming the setting value") indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk checks the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame illumination device 10, the board illumination device 76, and the voice output device 9, thereby grasping that the settings are being checked. becomes possible.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S28-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S28-6, ends the display on the status confirmation display 68 in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change processing.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power recovery designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed, but instead of the setting confirmation designation command, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the game ready state where the game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), input other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a Device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, big winning opening detection switch 50a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection The presence or absence of signal input from the sensor 54a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. No display is performed, and the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the passage is invalidated and the normal pattern display device 62 does not variably display the normal patterns, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 .

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing (game program). Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number update processing (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a is checked. A process of setting predetermined data is performed when a determination is made and there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening and closing the (large winning opening 50) and setting the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal electric power control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S500. Specifically, various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and payouts corresponding to various prize winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) Processing for transmitting the number designation command to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls that are discharged from the winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 53a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 54a for a predetermined period, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening opening/closing output to the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b data, first special symbol display device 60, special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special A process for creating data such as special design reservation display data to be output to the design reservation display device 64 and normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the start opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol Display output processing for outputting signals such as pending display data and normal symbol pending display data, and sending a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize described later Sphere counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) are referred to, and processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed. . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, To count game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50, and the payout device 95 pays out the prize balls. process.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do.

The main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52 or not. If the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process is terminated.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and this time ends the first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first starting point winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the first starting point winning designation command receives the first starting point winning. A designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice performance is performed over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning prize designated command. can be executed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, regarding the second start opening detection switch input processing, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, first pre-determination process, first starting opening winning designation command, respectively, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second special symbol reservation storage area, second reservation storage, second special symbol reservation number (U2), second 2 special symbol storage specification command, second pre-determining process, second start opening winning a prize specification command may be replaced. In the following description, the first starting point winning designation command and the second starting point winning designation command may be collectively referred to simply as the starting point winning designation command.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the pending memory (special figure determination information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1" A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed for performing a process for performing a process for performing the process. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the special figure is stopped and displayed according to the passage of the fluctuation time, and the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processes and the like is executed.
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is a losing special symbol, and the opening time of the jackpot game is set if the special symbol is a special symbol. Then, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small winning special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set and the special symbol stop processing ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing ( Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0" or "3" based on the processing for executing the small winning game and the ending of the small winning game. A small winning game process (step S350) for the purpose is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 5, the jackpot game end processing for performing the processing for ending the jackpot game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game, etc. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and designates special symbol storage corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after subtraction. is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second hold number is shifted to the first hold However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (the first number of reservations may be It may be subtracted with priority over the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbols based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table (FIG. 4) based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. A special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a pattern (variation time) is performed.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c in step S311-1, and selects a jackpot determination table (not shown) in step S311-2. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, the first not shown Select the jackpot determination table for the special symbol, and if it is shifted from the second special symbol determination information holding storage area, select the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol (not shown).

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random value for judging a big win with the big-hit judging table to judge whether or not it is a big win. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the current gaming state information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, in step S311-5 selects a special symbol determination table for a big win (not shown), and proceeds to step S311-7. transfer processing.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for losing (not shown), and shifts the process to step S311-7.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random number for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table for which the big hit determination is to be performed, A special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

At step S311-8, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined at step S311-7 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the big hit determination process.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step S850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S850-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 17, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

In addition, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the big winning opening 50, and the out balls that have flowed into the out opening 39 Instead of detecting, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detecting switch 39a, the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the big winning opening detecting switch 50a, the number of outs is determined. (Total number of outs, number of normal outs) should be incremented by one.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a timer interruption process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if the power-on designation command has been received, a process for performing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the power-on sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for performing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), A power restoration sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140, and a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received, and if received, the second stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 1 special design reservation number, second special design reservation number, normal design reservation number, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the starting opening winning prize designation command or the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is received, and if it is received, the prefetching system production is performed. Processing related to icon change effect and continuous notice effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design determination command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command, etc. is received, and processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command if received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, whether the general pattern designation command, general pattern variation designation command, normal pattern determination command, opening designation command for winning, and ending designation command for winning, etc. are received It determines whether or not, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when it is received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and a movable effect device (first movable member 73, An initial operation for operating the second movable member 74) in a predetermined manner, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 76 to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like are performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device conduct. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E315, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E316.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E316. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E317, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E319.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command received, the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and the performance showing the variation performance pattern The instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E317, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Alternatively, the process of determining the effect mode (pattern) of the big win notice effect to be executed and setting the execution information of the big win notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed.

In step E319, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command. If it is a design determination command, the process moves to step E320, and if it is not a design determination command, the process moves to step E321.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E322, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E322. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the processing of setting the performance designation command for determining the opening performance of the jackpot game and executing the opening performance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round designation command, , a process of determining a round effect of the round game and setting an effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specifying command, the ending effect of the jackpot game is determined. Then, the command for executing the ending effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 22) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is referred to, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

A first characteristic of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is that the variable display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is that the power supply is restored before the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance symbols is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the performance symbols are statically displayed. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 22 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As the sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
The look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon). Perform update processing.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on the winning to the first starting opening 45, the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is for winning to the second starting opening 47 If it is based on, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all of the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation (pre-reservation storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation are normally fluctuating, Decide whether it is shortened variation or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. , to determine one final icon display mode from among a plurality of final icon display modes.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 26, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. to determine one change scenario from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedence suspension are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where there is no ready-to-win effect than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the icon to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game will be played). icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win. .

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 25, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. Like to be selected.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 25, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected. .

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. , and for reference, prior changes in each change scenario and the mode of icon update in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. , "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display mode is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table referred to when determining a variable performance pattern. In the variable performance pattern determination table, the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the determined variable performance pattern are associated, and as a reference, the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern. is described.

The variable production pattern includes the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the audio output device 9, the board driving device 75, the board lighting device 76, the frame lighting device 10, the production button 17, the cross key 19 It is a production mode of a variable production performed using the production device, and the presence or absence of a pseudo continuous notice, the presence or absence of a ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc. are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 will be explained. In addition, since normal variation, shortening variation, and each ready-to-win effect are as described above, description thereof is omitted.

"Pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is executed or not, but ultimately the result is that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is not executed.
"Pseudo-continuous success" indicates that a stimulating effect is executed to determine whether or not the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed, and finally the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed.

"Button non-collision" means that an operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and in this operation promoting effect, the effect button 17 is operated or the effect button 17 is pressed. When the operation effective period elapses, a winning/losing informing effect for informing whether or not a jackpot is won is executed, but the effect button 17 does not move upward during the operation effective period in this operation promoting effect and is in a non-protruding state (normal state). is maintained at
"Button hit" means that an operation promoting effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 17 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and the effect button 17 is operated or the effect button 17 is operated in this operation promoting effect. When the effective period elapses, a winning/losing informing performance for informing whether or not the game is a jackpot is executed, but the performance button 17 moves upward during the operation valid period in this operation promoting performance to enter a projecting state (special state). is shown. In the following description, the winning/losing notification effect may be referred to as "determined effect".

“Roulette effect” means displaying a plurality of development destination icons indicating development destinations (for example, losing, SP reach, heat zone, etc.) on the first image display device 70, and one development from the plurality of development destination icons. This indicates that a roulette effect is performed to select a destination icon and move to the destination indicated by the selected destination icon.
"Zone effect" means that a specific effect (background display) different from the normal effect (background) is performed on the first image display device 70 to announce the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed (when the jackpot game is executed). This indicates that the zone effect will be performed.
"Hot zone effect" is a specific effect (background display) that is different from the normal zone effect, and foretells that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is higher than the normal zone effect (the jackpot game is executed). This indicates that the heat zone production will be performed.
The “next notice” indicates that the next notice effect for notifying the type of ready-to-win effect (SPSP ready-to-win effect, all-rotation ready-to-win effect in this embodiment) to be finally performed in the variable effect is to be performed.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The higher the number of executions, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed or the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the performance button 17 is in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the effect button 17 will be in the special state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, as a third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the final phase (final stage) of the ready-to-win effect is more pronounced when the heat zone effect is executed than when only the normal zone effect is executed. The effect button 17 tends to be in a special state during the operation effective period that occurs in . By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to which type of zone effect will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect or all-rotation ready-to-win effect is determined when the next notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the next notice effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 does not have a variable effect pattern in which normal reach is performed, SP reach is performed, and then SP SP reach is performed, but it may be provided.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 28, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the forewarning pattern of the big hit foretelling performance that makes the player expect that the big winning game will be executed. is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. Specifically, referring to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 29, a plurality of notice patterns (non-notice pattern ) is determined. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue notice effect" means that, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the variable effect, a dialog image suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device is displayed. It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the dialogue with the relatively high expectation is displayed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the production button 17 vibrates for, for example, one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog preview effect command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the dialog preview effect corresponding to the dialog pattern is executed. is displayed, and audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step E650-9.

“Step-up notice effect” is a jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among a plurality of step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Decide on a step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up pattern is executed. Step images are displayed on the screen, and sound effects corresponding to the step images are output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the forewarning pattern for executing the rocking forewarning effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the swinging notice effect, the process is moved to step E650-10, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the swing notice effect, the process is moved to step E650-11.

The “swing notice effect” means that the first movable member 73 moves from the origin position to the first effect position (see FIG. 60), and executes the effect of swinging up and down at the first effect position. It is a kind of performance. Specifically, when the big winning game is executed (the degree of expectation for the big winning is high) than when the big winning game is not executed, the swing announcement effect is more likely to be executed.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a sets the swinging notice effect command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the rocking announcement effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the rocking announcement effect is executed. It moves to a position, and an effect of swinging in the vertical direction is executed at the first effect position, or an effect sound corresponding to the swing is output. It should be noted that for the swinging forewarning effect as well, one pattern may be determined from a plurality of patterns such as the dialogue forewarning effect and the step-up forewarning effect.

In step E650-11, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the advance notice pattern for executing the increase notice effect. If it is the advance notice pattern for executing the rise notice effect, the processing is shifted to step E650-12, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the rise notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

The "rise notice effect" is a kind of jackpot notice effect in which the second movable member 74 moves from the origin position to the third effect position (see FIG. 68). Specifically, when the big win game is executed (the degree of expectation for the big win is high) than when the big win game is not executed, the increase notice effect is more likely to be executed.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the rising notice effect command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the rise notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, the rise notice effect is executed, and the second movable member 74 moves from the origin position to the third effect position. It moves, and a sound effect or the like is output according to the movement.
According to the above jackpot announcement effect determination process, execution of a plurality of jackpot announcement effects can be determined in one variation effect. Then, the execution times of the determined plurality of jackpot announcement effects may overlap each other. For example, the execution times of the dialogue foretelling effect and the rocking forewarning effect overlap, and the execution times of the dialogue foretelling effect and the rise foretelling effect overlap.

(Jackpot notice decision table)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a big win notice determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the big win notice effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the big win notice determination table.

The notice patterns include a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which dialogue notice effects are executed, a notice pattern in which a step-up notice effect is executed, a notice pattern in which a rocking notice effect is executed, and a rise notice effect. A notice pattern is set, and the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when step-up notice effects, swing notice effects, and rising notice effects are executed than when dialogue notice effects are executed. there is

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control section 141. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is not received, the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command. Perform animation pattern setting processing.

The production instruction command includes a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a notice production command, a variable production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like. is mentioned.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a variable production animation such as a background or character. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image). If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is transferred to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are displayed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP). Output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a flow chart showing command reception interruption processing of the integrated control unit 141, and this processing is executed by receiving a production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 31(b). FIG. 31(b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, the display of one frame of effect image from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends ( It is executed every time (1/30 second=about 33 ms) that a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 second=about 33 ms is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP), frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed within a timer interrupt process executed in the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 32, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories. Operation processing is not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of each character and the initial operation and initial light emission of each character are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 32, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. By doing so, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control section)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp/drive control section 150 .

In step R104-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R104-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R104-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R104-5.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R104-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R104-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R104-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R104-5.

In step R104-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R104-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R104-11.

In step R104-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R104-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R104-9. , the process moves to step R104-12.

In step R104-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R104-10, clear the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R104-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R104-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R104-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R104-20.

At step R104-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is moved to step R104-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is moved to step R104-19.

At step R104-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R104-15, the effect button 17 is pressed within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R104-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R104-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R104-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R104-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R104-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R104-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R104-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R104-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R104-22, executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 33, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (at the same time), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 33, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motion of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 33, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return motion of various accessories is never finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 33, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the production button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

The origin return processing of FIG. 33 may be configured as follows.
In FIG. 33, when each movable member is not at the origin position, it is immediately returned to the origin position from that position. . Alternatively, it may be returned to the origin position after being moved halfway to the performance position.
In FIG. 33, when each movable member is not at the origin position, it is immediately returned to the origin position from that position, but the initial operation may be performed from that position without returning to the origin position.
Further, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the conditions for returning to the origin position described above may be different for each movable member. For example, the first movable member 73 (movable member with a high degree of player's attention) that operates when a big win is announced immediately returns from that position to the origin position, performs an initial operation, and does not operate when a big win is announced. As for the movable member 74 (a movable member that attracts less attention from the player than the first movable member 73), the initial action may be performed from that position without returning to the origin position. As a result, the movable member, which attracts a lot of attention from the player, can be reliably caused to perform the initial operation from the initial position, thereby preventing, for example, the malfunction of the movable member when a big win is announced. On the other hand, for the movable members that are less noticeable to the player, the time required for the initial actions can be shortened by starting the initial action from that position instead of returning to the origin position.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. As shown in FIG.

In step R106-1, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the processing is shifted to step R106-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is shifted to step R106-7.

In step R106-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R106-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R106-3. In step R106-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" assuming that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R106-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R106-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R106-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R106-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R106-11. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R106-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R106-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R106-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

At step R106-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing product processing number is "0", the process moves to step R106-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R106-17.

In step R106-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R106-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial motion of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R106-17.

At step R106-14, the ramp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R106-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Concretely, with reference to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R106-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number is "1" in step R106-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R106-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R106-18, it is set in the lamp RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R106-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial motion of the frame role object have been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R106-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R106-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R106-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R106-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R106-22, clears the above-described initial processing number in step R106-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 34, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial actions of various roles, and to prevent obstruction of performance actions of various roles during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 34, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 34, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality is occurring.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 34, even if the initial action of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed, and the recovery error occurs. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 34, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the By doing so, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the effect action, and it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the effect action. will no longer occur.

(Lamp/drive control unit performance setting processing)
The role product effect setting process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 . FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing character object effect setting processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is performed within a timer interrupt process executed by the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). is executed in

In step R107, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not an effect instruction command has been received. If the effect instruction command is received, the process proceeds to step R108, and if the effect instruction command is not received, the current character object effect setting process is terminated.

In step R108, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable performance pattern command among the performance instruction commands, and corresponds to any of the variable performance pattern 4, the variable performance pattern 10, and the variable performance pattern 33 among the variable performance pattern commands. It is determined whether or not a variable performance pattern command to control is received. When the variable performance pattern command corresponding to any one of the variable performance pattern 4, the variable performance pattern 10, and the variable performance pattern 33 is received, the process is shifted to step R109, and the variable performance pattern 4, the variable performance pattern 10, If no variable effect pattern command corresponding to any of the variable effect patterns 33 has been received, the process proceeds to step R111.

In step R109, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the object to be driven, and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the performance position. In addition, in the variable effect pattern 4, the variable effect pattern 10, and the variable effect pattern 33, the first movable member 73 is moved to the "B" point (first effect position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and the "B" point By swinging the first movable member 73 at the (first effect position), a pseudo-continuous agitation is executed to agitate the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous advance notice.
For example, in case of the variable effect pattern 4, since "pseudo continuous failure" is to be executed (see FIG. 27), the pseudo continuous annoyance is executed but the pseudo continuous notice is not carried out. In the case of production pattern 10, since "pseudo-continuous success" is executed (see FIG. 27), pseudo-continuous advance notice is performed by executing pseudo-continuous agitation.
Therefore, in this process, the number of motor steps related to the movement from the origin position to point "B" and the number of motor steps related to swinging are set in order to cause the first movable member 73 to perform the pseudo continuous swing. .

In step R110, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the pseudo-continuation execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the pseudo-continuation execution flag is turned ON. This flag is referred to in the performance execution processing (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit, which will be described later, and when the execution timing of the simulated continuous fanning comes, the first movable member 73 to operate.

In step R111, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a notice effect command indicating a swing notice effect among the effect instruction commands has been received. When the advance notice performance command indicating the swing advance notice performance has been received, the processing is shifted to step R112, and when the advance notice performance command indicating the swing advance notice performance has not been received, the processing is shifted to step R114.

In step R112, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the object to be driven, and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the effect position. Note that the swinging advance notice effect is performed by moving the first movable member 73 to the "B" point (first effect position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and moving the first movable member 73 at the "B" point (first effect position). 73, in order to cause the first movable member 73 to execute the swing advance notice effect, the number of steps of the motor related to the movement from the origin position to the point "B" and the swing motion Set the number of steps of the motor related to

In step R113, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the swinging announcement effect execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the swinging notice effect execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit, which will be described later. operate on the basis of

In step R114, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a notice effect command indicating a rise notice effect among the effect instruction commands has been received. When the advance notice performance command indicating the rise notice performance is received, the processing is shifted to step R115, and when the advance notice performance command indicating the rise notice performance is not received, the processing is shifted to step R117.

In step R115, the lamp CPU 150a sets the second movable member 74 as the object to be driven, and performs processing for moving the second movable member 74 from the origin position to the effect position. In addition, the rise notice effect moves the second movable member 74 to the “E” point (third effect position, see FIG. 68 etc.), and at the “E” point (third effect position), the second movable part (rotation Since the effect is to rotate the body 74a), in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to the movement from the origin position to the point “E” and the number of steps of the second movable member 74 are performed in order to cause the second movable member 74 to execute the upward notice effect. The number of steps of the motor related to the rotation of the part (rotating body 74a) is set.

In step R116, the lamp CPU 150a turns on the rise notice effect execution flag. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the rise notice effect execution flag is turned ON. This flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit, which will be described later. to operate.

In step R117, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable effect pattern command among the effect instruction commands, and among the variable effect pattern commands, any one of the variable effect pattern 31 to the variable effect pattern 47 (that is, the variable effect of the jackpot). pattern) is received or not. When a variable performance pattern command corresponding to any one of the variable performance pattern 31 to the variable performance pattern 47 is received, the process is shifted to step R118, and the command corresponding to any of the variable performance pattern 31 to the variable performance pattern 47 is received. If the variable effect pattern command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R122.

In step R118, the lamp CPU 150a sets the first movable member 73 as the object to be driven, and performs processing for moving the first movable member 73 from the origin position to the performance position. In addition, in the variable performance pattern 31 to the variable performance pattern 47, the first movable member 73 is moved to the "C" point (second performance position, see FIG. 60, etc.) in the determination performance to inform whether or not the big win. to notify the jackpot.
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to the movement from the origin position to the "C" point is set so that the first movable member 73 is notified of the big win.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the big hit notification execution flag in step R119. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the jackpot notification execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit to be described later, and when the execution timing (determined performance) of the big hit notification comes, the first movable member 73 is set in step R118. Act on content.

In step R120, the lamp CPU 150a sets the third movable member (effect button 17) as the object to be driven, and performs processing for vibrating the third movable member (effect button 17). In addition, in the variable performance patterns 31 to 47, the big win is notified by vibrating the third movable member (performance button 17) for 5 seconds during the effective period for the determined performance for notifying whether or not the big win is achieved. It's becoming
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor related to the 5-second vibration is set so as to cause the third movable member (the effect button 17) to execute the notification of the big win.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the button vibration 1 execution flag in step R121. Specifically, the button vibration 1 execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit, which will be described later. It operates (vibrates) based on the contents set in R120.

In step R122, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable effect pattern command among the effect instruction commands, and the variable effect pattern 16 to variable effect pattern 22 and the variable effect pattern 39 to variable effect pattern 45 among the variable effect pattern commands. It is determined whether or not a variable performance pattern command corresponding to one of (that is, a variable performance pattern for SPSP reach) has been received. When a variable performance pattern command corresponding to any one of the variable performance pattern 16 to the variable performance pattern 22 and the variable performance pattern 39 to the variable performance pattern 45 is received, the process is shifted to step R123, and the variable performance patterns 16 to 45 are received. When the variable performance pattern command corresponding to any one of the variable performance pattern 22 and the variable performance pattern 39 to the variable performance pattern 45 is not received, the process proceeds to step R125.

In step R123, the lamp CPU 150a sets the second movable member 74 as the object to be driven, and performs processing for moving the second movable member 74 from the origin position to the effect position. In addition, in the variable effect pattern 16 to the variable effect pattern 22, and the variable effect pattern 39 to the variable effect pattern 45, after the loss is once notified in the normal reach, the second movable member 74 is moved to the "E" point (third effect position, FIG. 68 etc.), and by rotating the second movable part (rotating body 74a) at the "E" point (third effect position), a development effect is executed to notify that the SPSP reach has developed. It's becoming
Therefore, in this processing, in order to cause the second movable member 74 to execute the development effect, the number of steps of the motor related to the movement from the origin position to the point "E" and the number of steps related to the rotation of the second movable part (rotating body 74a) Sets the number of motor steps.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the development effect execution flag in step R124. Specifically, in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c, the development effect execution flag is turned ON. The flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/driving control unit, which will be described later. Operate.

In step R125, the lamp CPU 150a receives the variable effect pattern command among the effect instruction commands, and the variable effect pattern command corresponding to either the variable effect pattern 17 or the variable effect pattern 47 among the variable effect pattern commands. is received. When the variable performance pattern command corresponding to either the variable performance pattern 17 or the variable performance pattern 47 is received, the process is shifted to step R126, and the command corresponding to either the variable performance pattern 17 or the variable performance pattern 47 is received. When the variable effect pattern command is not received, the character object effect setting process of this time is terminated.

In step R126, the lamp CPU 150a sets the third movable member (effect button 17) as the object to be driven, and performs processing for vibrating the third movable member (effect button 17). In addition, in the variable performance pattern 17 and the variable performance pattern 47, the third movable member (performance button 17) is vibrated for one second during the effective period (for example, at the time of start of variation) for the announcement of the big win to expect the big win. I'm trying to make you expect that it will be a big hit.
Therefore, in this process, the number of steps of the motor for one-second vibration is set so that the third movable member (production button 17) executes a jackpot advance notice that expects a jackpot.

The lamp CPU 150a turns on the button vibration 2 execution flag in step R127. Specifically, the button vibration 2 execution flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. The flag is referred to in the performance execution process (see FIG. 36) of the lamp/drive control unit to be described later, and the third movable member (the performance button 17) operates (vibrates) based on the contents set in step R126.

(Ramp/drive control unit performance execution processing)
The role product presentation execution processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 . FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing character object performance execution processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp/drive control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). is executed after the role product effect setting process.

In step R125, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the pseudo continuous driving execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the pseudo continuous swing execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R126, and if the pseudo continuous swing execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R129.

In step R126, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R127, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R129.

In addition, in FIG. 36, in determining whether or not the execution timing has come, the time from the start of the variable effect is managed, and the execution timing has come when it is time to execute a predetermined pseudo-continuous effect. Alternatively, the number of display frames (for example, 30 frames per second) from the start of the variable effect is managed, and when the number of display frames reaches a predetermined number of display frames for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, it becomes the execution timing. You can judge that.

In step R127, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R128, turns off the pseudo-continuous driving execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to the "B" point (first rendering position, see FIG. 66, etc.), and the first movable member 73 swings at the "B" point (first rendering position). Pseudo reaming is executed.

In step R129, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the rocking advance notice effect execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the rocking advance notice effect execution flag is ON, the process is moved to step R130, and if the rocking notice effect execution flag is not ON, the process is moved to step R133.

In step R130, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R131, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R133.

In step R131, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R132, turns off the rocking advance notice effect execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to the "B" point (first rendering position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and the first movable member 73 swings at the "B" point (first rendering position). A rocking forewarning effect is executed.

In step R133, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the increase notice effect execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the rise notice effect execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R134, and if the rise notice effect execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R137.

In step R134, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R135, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R137.

In step R135, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R136, turns off the rise notice effect execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the second movable member 74 is moved to the "E" point (the third effect position, see FIG. 68, etc.), and the second movable part (rotating body 74a) is rotated to execute the advance notice effect. Become.

In step R137, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the big hit notification execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the jackpot notification execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R138, and if the jackpot notification execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R141.

In step R138, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R139, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R141.

In step R139, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R140, turns off the big win notification execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the first movable member 73 moves to the "C" point (second effect position, see FIG. 60, etc.), and the big hit notification is executed.

In step R141, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the button vibration 1 execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the button vibration 1 execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R142, and if the button vibration 1 execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R145.

In step R142, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R143, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R145.

In step R143, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R144, turns off the button vibration 1 execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the third movable member (production button 17) vibrates for 5 seconds, and the big hit notification is executed.

In step R145, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the development effect execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the development effect execution flag is ON, the process moves to step R146, and if the development effect execution flag is not ON, the process moves to step R149.

In step R146, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R147, and if the execution timing has not come, the process proceeds to step R149.

In step R147, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R148, turns off the development effect execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the second movable member 74 moves to the "E" point (third rendering position, see FIG. 62, etc.) and the second movable part (rotating body 74a) rotates, thereby informing that the SPSP reach has developed. The development production to be performed will be executed.

In step R149, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the button vibration 2 execution flag is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c. If the button vibration 2 execution flag is ON, the process proceeds to step R150, and if the button vibration 2 execution flag is not ON, the current accessory performance execution process is terminated.

In step R150, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the execution timing has come. If the execution timing has come, the process proceeds to step R151, and if the execution timing has not come, the present performance execution process is terminated.

In step R151, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven, and in step R152, turns off the button vibration 2 execution flag that is ON in a predetermined area of the lamp RAM 150c.
As a result, the third movable member (performance button 17) vibrates for one second, and a big win advance notice is executed to expect a big win.

(First modification)
A first modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. The first modification differs from the first embodiment in that the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Therefore, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are cleared by RWM. Processing for initial operation is performed until the preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 an RWM clear designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized in step S24-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the above-described RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources in response to termination of the RWM clear preparation mode by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting opening opening/closing member 48 and the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (large winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display device 59 (the first special symbol display 60, the second Special symbol display device 61, etc.), first image display device 70, and information display device 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of RWM clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "operation of solenoid Please confirm", alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T1, the first image display device 70 starts to display "Preparing for RWM clear" (display of RWM clear preparation screen), but it notifies that the initial operation of various drive sources is being performed. You can start displaying.
For example, the first image display device 70 may display "driving source initializing" and alternately or simultaneously with the display "RWM clearing in preparation".
In addition, when the initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid" is being output, the first image display device 70 displays "Driving source initial operation" to indicate "Check the operation of the solenoid". When the initial operation confirmation sound of "please, please" is not output, the display of "driving source initializing" may not be displayed.
With the above configuration, confirmation of the operation of various driving sources can be prompted not only by voice but also by display, so that the user can pay attention to confirming the operation of various driving sources.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display device 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are displayed in the information display 113. All lights are turned on and the lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, the above-described power-on command (power-on designation command or power restoration designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130, and the power-on command is transmitted (effect control The initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is started based on the reception by the board 130). That is, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG.
That is, even if power is supplied from the power supply board 160 to the effect control board 130, if the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110 is not received, the movable effect device (the first movable member 73, the second 2 movable member 74) will not be initiated.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

It should be noted that the confirmation (operation) of the lighting of the information display 113 for 5 seconds from the timing of T10 to the timing of T11 can be said to be the initial operation of the information display 113 . That is, in the example of FIG. 38, the initial operation of various driving sources is performed from timing T1 to timing T10, and then the initial operation of the information display 113 is performed from timing T10 to timing T11. The initial motion of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 12 or 2 seconds) from the timing.
That is, in the example of FIG. 38, the initial operations of the various drive sources overlap the initial operations of the information display 113 and the initial operations of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74). However, the initial operation of the information display device 113 and the initial operation of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are executed at the same time.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the big winning opening opening/closing member 51, etc.) that affect the result of the game ) for operating the various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) are initially operated, so that the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) Check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) can be easily performed.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main controller excluding the state confirmation display 68 is displayed. Since the information display device 59 (the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, etc.) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, the main control board 110 is not given an extra processing load. In addition, it is possible to concentrate on confirming the operation of various driving sources.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, two types of initial motions are performed in order. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and then the game progresses. Since the initial operation of the information display 113 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the game-enabled state where the control is performed, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation can be properly performed. can be done. In particular, the initial actions of various drive sources for moving the movable bodies that affect the game results are performed independently so as not to overlap with other initial actions. It is possible to prevent an oversight of whether or not a problem has occurred, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) that does not affect the result of the game, and the operation that affects the result of the game. Since the initial operation of the information display device 113, which is not present, is performed at the same time, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the large winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 due to the light, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the large winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the open signal is output even though the large winning opening 50 is open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can control the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as collecting information that does not comply with the request.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this modified example, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, a setting change screen displaying the characters "setting change in progress" is displayed. Alternatively, a setting changing screen may be displayed on which characters such as "driving source initial operation" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources are displayed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 39, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, non-time-saving game state auxiliary game Operation, auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) to compare the operation.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the non-time saving game state. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the non-time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, even if the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b at the time of the initial operation is the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the non-time-saving game state good. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the non-time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. becomes.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the non-time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, one drive time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a larger value than the driving time of the big winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
A second modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. In addition, in the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the state confirmation display 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. In addition, only different points will be described below.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, various drive sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are cleared by RWM. Processing for initial operation is performed until the preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, and in step S27, initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting opening opening/closing member 48 and the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (large winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display device 59 (the first special symbol display 60, the second Special symbol display device 61, etc.), first image display device 70, and information display device 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of RWM clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "operation of solenoid Please confirm", alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started. In FIG. 41 as well, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "driving source initializing".

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display device 59 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are displayed in the information display 113. All lights are turned on and the lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, the above-described power-on command (power-on designation command or power restoration designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130, and the power-on command is transmitted (effect control The initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is started based on the reception by the board 130). That is, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG.
That is, even if power is supplied from the power supply board 160 to the effect control board 130, if the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110 is not received, the movable effect device (the first movable member 73, the second 2 movable member 74) will not be initiated.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

It should be noted that the confirmation (operation) of the lighting of the information display 113 for 5 seconds from the timing of T10 to the timing of T11 can be said to be the initial operation of the information display 113 . That is, in the example of FIG. 41, the initial operation of various driving sources is performed from timing T1 to timing T10, and then the initial operation of the information display 113 is performed from timing T10 to timing T11. The initial motion of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 12 or 2 seconds) from the timing.
That is, in the example of FIG. 41, the initial operations of the various drive sources overlap the initial operations of the information display 113 and the initial operations of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74). However, the initial operation of the information display device 113 and the initial operation of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are executed at the same time.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the big winning opening opening/closing member 51, etc.) that affect the result of the game ) for operating the various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) are initially operated, so that the game machine 1 (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) Check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) can be easily performed.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display device 59 (the first Since the special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, etc.) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and various driving It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it is confirmed that the RWM clearing preparation is in progress and the operation of the various drive sources is confirmed. Since the RWM clear preparation notification is provided to prompt the operator, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so the progress control of the game is started. There is no need to create a plurality of states in the previous pre-start state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources elapses. As a result, the initial operations of various driving sources are not performed in a game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operations of various driving sources according to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, two types of initial motions are performed in order. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and then the game progresses. Since the initial operation of the information display 113 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the game-enabled state where the control is performed, the two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation confirmation can be properly performed. can be done. In particular, the initial actions of various drive sources for moving the movable bodies that affect the game results are performed independently so as not to overlap with other initial actions. It is possible to prevent an oversight of whether or not a problem has occurred, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) that does not affect the result of the game, and the operation that affects the result of the game. Since the initial operation of the information display device 113, which is not present, is performed at the same time, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various driving sources for operating the large winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the big winning opening opening/closing member 51 due to the light, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the large winning opening opening/closing member 51 are initially operated, the open signal is output even though the large winning opening 50 is open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can control the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience such as collecting information that does not comply with the request.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In this modified example, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, a clear preparation screen displaying the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" was displayed. In addition to the text, you can also display a clear preparation screen that displays the text "Driving source initial operation" or "Please check solenoid operation" to visually confirm the initial operation of various driving sources. good.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening and closing solenoid 48b, big winning opening opening and closing solenoid 51b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification Operation, auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 39, so the explanation here is omitted.

The scene where the various drive sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) are initialized is not limited to the example in FIG. 38 or the example in FIG.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the setting is changed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the setting is confirmed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary for setting change is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting is being changed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary for setting confirmation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an RWM clear approval operation is performed (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).
For example, the initial operation may be started when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).

(Modification of the specific example (FIG. 38) in the case of initializing various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A modification of the specific example (FIG. 38) in which various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various driving sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
Note that only points different from FIG. 38 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. Also, in FIG. 42, the description of the "setting confirmation mode" and the "big prize opening LED" described in FIG. It is the same as in FIG. 38 in that the "winning hole LED" is OFF from beginning to end.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting opening opening/closing member 48 and the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (large winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display device 59 (the first special symbol display 60, the second Special symbol display device 61, etc.), first image display device 70, and information display device 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of RWM clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "operation of solenoid Please confirm", alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started. In FIG. 42 as well, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "driving source initializing".

Further, at the timing of T1, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is supplied with power from the power supply board 160 to the effect control board 130. ) is started. That is, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG.
In other words, as long as power is supplied from the power supply board 160, the effect control board 130 can operate the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) without requiring a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110. ) can be started.

At the timing of T1, the initial operation of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is started, so as shown in FIG. An initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is performed in front of the "medium" display (display of the RWM clear preparation screen).
Therefore, the "RWM clearing preparations in progress" display (RWM clearing preparations screen display) on the first image display device 70 becomes difficult to see. It may be displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the operation range of the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). For example, it may be displayed on the upper left or upper right of the display area. As a result, the "RWM clearing preparations in progress" display (display of the RWM clearing preparations screen) does not become difficult to see, and it is possible to clearly recognize that the RWM clearing preparations are in progress.
Similarly, when the first image display device 70 displays "driving source initial operation", it overlaps with the operation range of the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). It should be displayed in a display area that does not. This makes it possible to clearly recognize that the drive source is being initialized.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

As in FIG. 38, the time required for the initial action of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is, for example, "12.2 seconds".
That is, in the example of FIG. 42, the initial operation of various drive sources and the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are started from timing T1. The execution timing of the initial motion of the source and the execution timing of the initial motion of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) overlap.
Initial operations of various drive sources are executed from timing T1 to timing T10, and initial operations of the information display 113 are started from timing T10.
Therefore, the execution timing of the initial operation of the various drive sources and the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) overlap, but the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display 113 does not overlap with these and runs alone.

In the example of FIG. 42, for example, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) performed on the game board and the initial operation of various drive sources are simultaneously confirmed. After that, the RWM clear approval operation is completed, and the initial operation of the information display 113 can be confirmed. In other words, the necessary work (initial operation confirmation) to be performed on the front side of the gaming machine 1 (on the game board surface) is completed collectively, and then the necessary work to be performed on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (completion of RWM clear approval operation) , initial operation check) can be completed together. Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency related to the necessary work.

For example, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), and the initial operation of the various drive sources is Although it ends, the initial motion of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) does not end, and ends at the timing of T9.
In this case, the initial operation of the information display 113 starts at the timing of T4 when the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF) and the initial operation of the various driving sources is completed. , the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display 113 may overlap.

(Modification of the specific example (FIG. 41) in the case of initializing various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A modification of the specific example (FIG. 41) in which various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
Note that only points different from FIG. 41 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. Also, in FIG. 43, the description of the "big prize opening LED" described in FIG. 41 is omitted, but the point that the "big prize opening LED" is OFF from beginning to end is the same as in FIG.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) for operating the starting opening opening/closing member 48 and the big winning opening opening/closing member 51) are stopped.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (large winning hole 50) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display device 59 (the first special symbol display 60, the second Special symbol display device 61, etc.), first image display device 70, and information display device 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice). In FIG. 43 as well, as described with reference to FIG. 38, the first image display device 70 may display "driving source initializing".

Further, at the timing of T1, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is supplied with power from the power supply board 160 to the effect control board 130. ) is started. That is, the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) in the example of FIG.
In other words, as long as power is supplied from the power supply board 160, the effect control board 130 can operate the movable effect devices (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) without requiring a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110. ) can be started. Also in FIG. 43, as described in FIG. 42, the "RWM clearing preparations in progress" display (the display of the RWM clearing preparation screen) is the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). may be displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the operation range of . Similarly, when the first image display device 70 displays "driving source initial operation", it overlaps with the operation range of the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). It should be displayed in a display area that does not.

As in FIG. 41, the time required for the initial action of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is, for example, "12.2 seconds".
That is, in the example of FIG. 43, the initial operation of various drive sources and the initial operation of the movable effect device (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are started from timing T1. The execution timing of the initial motion of the source and the execution timing of the initial motion of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) overlap.
Initial operations of various drive sources are executed from timing T1 to timing T10, and initial operations of the information display 113 are started from timing T10.
Therefore, the execution timing of the initial operation of the various drive sources and the execution timing of the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) overlap, but the execution timing of the initial operation of the information display 113 does not overlap with these and runs alone.

In the example of FIG. 43, for example, the initial actions of the movable effect devices (first movable member 73 and second movable member 74) performed on the game board and the initial actions of various drive sources are simultaneously confirmed. After that, the RWM clear approval operation is completed, and the initial operation of the information display 113 can be confirmed. In other words, the necessary work (initial operation confirmation) to be performed on the front side of the gaming machine 1 (on the game board surface) is completed collectively, and then the necessary work to be performed on the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (completion of RWM clear approval operation) , initial operation check) can be completed together. Therefore, it is possible to improve the time efficiency related to the necessary work.

Also in FIG. 43, the execution timing of the initial action of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the execution timing of the initial action of the information display 113 described in FIG. 42 overlap. exceptions can occur.

The scene where the various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b) are initialized is not limited to the example in FIG. 42 or the example in FIG.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the setting is changed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when the setting is confirmed and the setting key switch 112a is turned off.
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary for setting change is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting is being changed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an operation necessary for setting confirmation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON). In this case, the initial operation may be continued while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting key switch 112a is ON).
For example, the initial operation may be started when an RWM clear approval operation is performed (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).
For example, the initial operation may be started when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on (in a gaming machine that does not have settings).

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

In each initial operation pattern, a lighting (emission) pattern of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is set. For example, in the initial operation pattern 01, a lighting (light emission) pattern is set in which the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white, and the second movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white. there is
In FIG. 44, lighting (lighting) in blue and white means that the LEDs alternately light (light) in blue→white→blue→white.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 rises, rotates at the raised position for a predetermined time, then stops, and then returns to the origin. lights up (lights up) alternately. It should be noted that the required time for "initial operation pattern 01" is "12.2 seconds".
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 rotates from the rising position to the rising position for a predetermined time. The operation is performed in the order of stop→return to origin, and the second movable member LED alternately lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED alternately lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

Note that the lighting (light emission) pattern of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED in the board accessory initial operation pattern shown in FIG. 44 may be changed as appropriate. For example, even in the initial motion of the board role, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the order of red→green→blue, as in the later-described frame role initial motion pattern 01 (see FIG. 45). There may be a lighting (emission) pattern for lighting (emission) at .

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin → intermittent vibration (2 seconds). During that period, the production button LED lights up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button is greatly raised & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin , and the production button lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds) → return to origin, and the production button LED goes out during that period.

It should be noted that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibrates in the case of the valid period for the big win notice to expect the big win, and 5 seconds in the valid period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur). Second vibration) is different time.

A first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on executes an action that is not included in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

A third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored One point is that the numbers are different. By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial operation of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. By doing so, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

Not starting the initial action of the production button 17 corresponds to not executing the "large rise" in the initial action shown in FIG. )” and “intermittent vibration (2 seconds)” are not included. That is, even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed. In other words, the above "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are determined in advance regardless of the position of the production button 17 (whether it is the origin position or the large rising position). It can be said that when the timing is reached, it will be executed for a predetermined period of time.
For example, if "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" or "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" is executed in conjunction with the operating position of the production button 17 (large rise position, origin position returned from the large rise position) , Although the performance button 17 can be vibrated without any problem, the performance button 17 vibrates without any problem due to the inability of the performance button 17 to move to the large rise position and the origin position returned from the large rise position. There is a concern that it is not even possible to confirm that it is possible to do so.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49, only "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" among the initial actions are predetermined even if the effect button 17 has a return abnormality. The above concern can be eliminated by executing for a predetermined time when the timing is reached.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect The operation of returning the button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect The operation of returning the button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect The operation of returning the button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect The operation of returning the button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.
It should be noted that the point that the initial action of the effect button 17 is not started is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 49, so description here will be omitted.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect The operation of returning the button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the production control board 130, but power is not supplied to the main control board 110, and from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 , the command communication line is disconnected, and the connector of the command communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the pending number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the state where the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (a production design designation command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

A specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is the same as the above-described specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received.

(Concrete example when power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 56 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect or not, the customer waiting state designation command is received). (or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance, jackpot variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending ), even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of ), the image display is not performed until the power-on designation command as the power-on command is received at the timing of T4. Except for the fact that the screen displayed on the device is a variable production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen) or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen), during the customer waiting state This is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial actions of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are already finished, the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" when the power is restored. A second standby screen in which the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect The button LED is illuminated while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( Sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) is also displayed Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin position of the production button 17 return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

Then, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

After that, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. Initial operation is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. .

In addition, during the execution of the variable effect (losing variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, that is, the variable effect screen on the image display device If the power supply restoration designation command is received while is displayed, the operation is the same as the timing after T2 in the specific example shown in FIG.

In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the output of the return operation, initial operation, and initialization notification sound of various accessories has already ended, that is, the opening effect screen on the image display device, If the power recovery designation command is received while either the round effect screen or the ending effect screen is being displayed, the display content of the image display device is excluded, and after the timing of T2 in the specific example shown in FIG. It will be the same.

Specifically, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect screen instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and continues to display the special jackpot effect screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. maintain. The display of the special big win effect screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial actions of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device after restoration to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory After recovery to The display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display during recovery) is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and the sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the suspension display is not executed in the suspension icon display area while the specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed on the image display device, but the suspension display can be performed in the sub suspension display. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81, the second sub-variation display device 82), after the game control state is restored, the special symbol Even if the variable display is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may be made to display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as when the character is released, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, during the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), light emission of various accessories Parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (special During the variable display of the pattern and before the display of the production pattern 70a), the initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) becomes a display mode showing the number of holdings. It's like By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, for the frame accessory (production button 17), when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device 70a), the initial operation is performed after the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the frame role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main screen is displayed. When receiving a special symbol memory specifying command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port from the control board 110, a winning sound is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main screen is displayed. When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, the variation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the main screen is displayed. When a variable start command is received from the control board 110, the variable performance is executed without executing the return action or the initial action of various accessories. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board When a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply to 110, the return operation of various characters and the initial operation are performed again. (including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, during the return action of various roles, and after the initial action (including initial light emission) is completed, during the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production) Even so, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, various accessories return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, even during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, When a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When the power supply is restarted from the main control board 110 after the power supply is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 46 to 56, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When a recovery designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply of the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

(Modified example in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 57 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. is a diagram showing a modification in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect or not, the customer waiting state designation command is received). (or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. , and the effect button LED is extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance, jackpot variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending ), even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of ), the image display device will be restored before the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T3. Except for the fact that the displayed screen is a variable production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen) or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen), the main control during the customer waiting state This is the same as when only the power supply to the substrate 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are already finished, the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" when the power is restored. A second standby screen in which the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect The button LED is illuminated while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( Sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) is also displayed Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin position of the production button 17 return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

Then, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

After that, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

Then, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. .

In addition, during the execution of the variable effect (losing variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, that is, the variable effect screen on the image display device is displayed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted. An initial screen containing the characters "medium" is displayed, and after that, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a command at power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation of various characters, and Initial actions are performed. At this time, instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays a recovering screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the recovering screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. maintain.

In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending) after the output of the return operation, initial operation, and initialization notification sound of various accessories has already ended, that is, the opening effect screen on the image display device, When either the round effect screen or the ending effect screen is displayed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed. In this case as well, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", after which the control board 130 directs a power restoration designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. When received, return actions of various roles and initial actions are executed. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance screen instead of the normal jackpot performance screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot performance screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. . The display of the special big win effect screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, an initial screen different from the standby screen is displayed from the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It is designed to switch. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 57, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and The performance button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

Instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen at the stage of receiving the power-on designation command. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed (power-on designation command is received), the initial screen is displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. can be In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up (lights up) in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 58, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 returns. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

46 to 58, the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is described as a type dependent on the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110. 42 and 43, the initial operation of the movable effect device (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) is of a type that does not depend on the power ON command sent from the main control board 110. 46 to 58 may be performed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 59 to 71, the modes of the initial actions and the modes of the performance actions of the various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the production button 17) described in FIGS. 44 to 58 etc. will be explained.

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of the first movable member)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the required time.
First, "A" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73, "B" indicates the first initial operation position of the first movable member 73, and "C" indicates the first movable member. A second initial operating position of 73 is shown. The first initial action position of "B" is the same position as the first effect position in FIG. 78 described later, and the second initial action position of "C" is the same as the second effect position in FIG. 78 described later. position. In the following, they are simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C".

(a) shows a mode of "first movable member small descent" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the “first movable member small descent”, the first movable member 73 moves from “A” to “B” in “0.3 S (seconds)”. In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "A" to "B" at once without stopping on the way.
In (a) to (f), the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 alternately lights up (lights up) in blue and white (see FIG. 44).

(b) shows a mode in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "B" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 44). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "B", it stops (stays) at "B" for "1S".

(c) shows a mode of "first movable member returning to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member return to origin", the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to "A" over a period of "0.6S". In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "B" to "A" without stopping on the way.

In this way, when the first movable member 73 returns to the origin position by performing a small descent related to the initial operation, it takes longer to move from "B" to "A" than to move from "A" to "B". The relationship is such that time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a function that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", especially "B" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time required for the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time required for the movement from "A" to "B", the initial operation is executed without applying a load to the driving source of the first movable member 73. can do.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "B" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "B" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "B" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from 'B' to 'B'.
As a result, for example, using the time during which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "B", the operator (factory worker, game store clerk) is made to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the first movable member 73. be able to.

(d) shows a mode of "large lowering of the first movable member" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "large lowering of the first movable member", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "0.8 S".

(e) shows a mode in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 44). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for "2S".

(f) shows a mode of "first movable member returning to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "first movable member return to origin", the first movable member 73 moves from "C" to "A" over a period of "1.6S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 returns to the origin position by performing the large descent related to the initial operation, it takes longer to move from "C" to "A" than to move from "A" to "C". The relationship is such that time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a function that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", especially "C" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time required for movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time required for movement from "A" to "C", the initial operation is executed without applying a load to the driving source of the first movable member 73. can do.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "C" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "C" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "C" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that it is the time it takes to move from "C" to "C".
As a result, for example, by using the time during which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C", the operator (factory worker, game store clerk) is made to check whether the first movable member 73 has a defect or the like. be able to.

(Concrete example of effect operation mode and required time of the first movable member)
60A and 60B are diagrams showing specific examples of the mode of the performance operation of the first movable member 73 and the required time.
First, "A" indicates the origin position of the first movable member 73, "B" indicates the first rendering position of the first movable member 73, and "C" indicates the first movable member 73. 2 shows the second effect position of . The first rendering position for "B" is the same position as the first initial motion position in FIG. 77 described above, and the second rendering position for "C" is the same as the second initial motion position in FIG. position. In the following, they are simply referred to as "A", "B", and "C". It is also assumed that the operation of the movement process is the same as that of the initial operation mode of FIG.

(a) shows the effect mode of the above-mentioned "shake notice". In other words, it indicates that the "first movable member small descent" has been performed while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner.
In this "swing notice", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "B" in "0.5 S (seconds)".
In (a) to (c), the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 alternately lights up (lights up) in red and white (see FIG. 69 described later).

(b) shows that the first movable member 73 is rocked vertically after moving to "B" (the "rocking" is omitted in FIG. 69). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "B", it swings (stays) at "B" for "3S".
Such an effect operation mode is designed to improve the sense of expectation for the awarding of the jackpot game.

(c) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 described later) in "prediction of rocking motion". That is, after finishing the swing for "3S" at "B", the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to "A" over "0.8S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 returns to the origin position by performing a small descent related to the performance action, the movement from "B" to "A" takes longer than the time to move from "A" to "B". The relationship is such that time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a function that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", especially "B" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time required for moving from "A" to "A" longer than the time required for moving from "A" to "B", the production operation is executed without applying a load to the driving source of the first movable member 73. can do.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "B" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "B" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "B" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that the time it takes to move from 'B' to 'B'.
As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the swing motion performed in "B", and to improve the player's expectation for the awarding of the big winning game.
In addition, when compared with the initial motion in FIG. 77, all of the travel time from "A" to "B", stay time at "B", and travel time from "B" to "A" are longer than the initial motion. The performance operation takes a longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is to consider the situation in each action scene.
For example, when the initial action is performed, the operator (factory, game clerk) only needs to focus on the initial action, so even if the operator (factory, game clerk) performs the action in a shorter required time than the production action, the worker (factory, game clerk) ) is unlikely to miss the initial action.
On the other hand, when the performance action is performed, for example, various big hit prediction performances may be simultaneously performed in addition to the rocking notice, and the range of the player's attention on the game board 5 is wide. Therefore, if the operation is performed in the same time as the initial operation or in a time shorter than the initial operation, there is a concern that the player will be late in noticing that the big win announcement effect using the first movable member 73 is being executed.
Therefore, in the initial action, the first movable member 73 is operated in a shorter time than the production action to shorten the time related to the initial action, and in the production action, the first movable member 73 is operated in a longer time than the initial action. It eliminates the concern that it will be delayed to notice that the jackpot announcement effect using is being executed.

(d) shows the effect mode of the big hit notification in the above-described "determined effect". That is, the special symbol TZ is "777" and is temporarily stopped, indicating that the "first movable member large descent" has been performed.
In the big hit notification in this "determined effect", the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" in "1S (seconds)".
Also, at the position (first image display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 moved to "C", the effect image EF that was not displayed during the initial operation (see FIG. 59) is displayed. It is emphasized that it has become a big hit.
In addition, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow when the movement of the first movable member 73 from "A" to "C" starts. That is, the lamp CPU 150a drives the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75, to move the first movable member 73 from "A" to "C", and also drives the board lighting device 76. The first movable member LED (full color), which is a part, is lit (lighted) in a rainbow (see FIG. 69 described later). The lighting (lighting) mode of the rainbow is a lighting (lighting) mode for deterministically informing that a big win has been achieved.

(e) shows a mode in which the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C" (the "stop" is omitted in FIG. 69). That is, when the first movable member 73 moves to "C", it stops (stays) at "C" for "5S".
Note that even when the "stop" is being performed, the first movable member LED of the first movable member 73 is lit (lighted) in a rainbow, and the position corresponding to the circumference of the first movable member 73 (first An effect image EF is displayed on the image display device 70).

(f) shows a mode of "first movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 to be described later) in the big hit notification of "determined effect". That is, after finishing the stop for "5S" at "C", the first movable member 73 moves from "C" to "A" for "2S".

In this way, when the first movable member 73 returns to the origin position by performing a large descent related to the performance action, the movement from "C" to "A" takes longer than the time to move from "A" to "C". The relationship is such that time is longer.
In particular, since the first movable member 73 has a predetermined amount of weight and is a function that moves downward (in the vertical direction) from "A", especially "C" that moves against the vertical direction. By making the time required for the movement from "A" to "A" longer than the time required for the movement from "A" to "C", the production operation is executed without applying a load to the driving source of the first movable member 73. can do.
In addition, when the time spent stopping at "C" is included in the comparison, the time spent stopping at "C" is the longest, followed by the time to move from "C" to "A", followed by "A". The relationship is such that it is the time it takes to move from "C" to "C".
Thereby, for example, when the first movable member 73 is stopped at "C", it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that the player has won a big win, and the player moves from "C" to "A". When there is, moving from 'A' to 'C' takes longer than moving from 'A' to 'C'. can.
In addition, when compared with the initial motion in FIG. 59, all of the travel time from "A" to "C", stay time at "C", and travel time from "C" to "A" are longer than the initial action. The performance operation takes a longer time.
The reason for such a time relationship is generally the same as the content described in (a) to (c) above, but (d) to (f) are jackpot notifications, so in particular, " By making the staying time at "C" and the moving time from "C" to "A" longer than the initial action, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for having won a big hit, and to increase the player's satisfaction. There is also the point that you can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the big hit.
In addition, in FIGS. 60(d) to (f), the scene of the big win notification of the “determined effect” was explained as an example, but the scene is not limited to this, and may be applied to other scenes. For example, it may be applied to a scene informing that a high probability gaming state is provided, or may be applied to a scene informing that a time saving gaming state is provided.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Also, the time relationships described in FIGS. 59 and 60 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "A" to "B" and the travel time from "B" to "A" may be the same, or the travel time from "B" to "A" may be longer than the travel time from "A" to "A". The travel time of "B" may be longer.
Also, although the stop (stay) time is the longest at "B" and "C", it may be the shortest, and it is not necessary to stop (stay) at "B" or "C".

(Specific example of initial operation mode and required time of the second movable member)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a specific example of the mode of the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the required time.
First, "D" indicates the origin position of the second movable member 74, and "E" indicates the initial operating position of the second movable member 74 (for convenience, referred to as the third initial operating position in this embodiment). ing. The third initial action position of "E" is the same position as the third rendering position in FIG. 63, which will be described later. In the following, they are simply described as "D" and "E".

(a) shows a mode of "rising the second movable member" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "rise of the second movable member", the second movable member 74 moves from "D" to "E" in "0.6 S (seconds)". In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "D" to "E" at once without stopping on the way.
In (a) to (c), the second movable member LED of the second movable member 74 alternately lights up (lights up) in blue and white (see FIG. 44).

(b) shows a state in which the rotating body 74a rotates after the second movable member 74 moves to "E" and then stops. That is, when the second movable member 74 moves to "E", it stops (stays) at "E" for "5S".

(c) shows a mode of "second movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 44). That is, in the "return to origin of the second movable member", the second movable member 74 moves from "E" to "D" in "0.3 S". In the movement, it is assumed that the movement is made from "E" to "D" at once without stopping on the way.

In this way, when the second movable member 74 performs the upward movement related to the initial operation and returns to the origin position, the time required to move from "D" to "E" is longer than the time required to move from "E" to "D". is longer than .
In particular, the second movable member 74 has a predetermined amount of weight, and is a function that can move upward (in a direction against the vertical direction) from "D". By making the time required for the movement from "D" to "E" longer than the time required for the movement from "E" to "D", the drive source of the second movable member 74 is not loaded. Initial actions can be performed.
In addition, when comparing the stay time at ``D'', the time spent stopping at ``D'' is the longest, followed by the time to move from ``D'' to ``E'', and then from ``E'' to `` Time to move to "D".
As a result, for example, using the time during which the second movable member 74 is stopped at "E", the operator (factory worker, game store clerk) is made to confirm whether or not the second movable member 74 has a defect or the like. be able to.

(Concrete example of effect operation mode and required time of the second movable member)
62A and 62B are diagrams showing specific examples of the mode of the performance operation of the second movable member 74 and the required time.
First, "D" indicates the origin position of the second movable member 74, and "E" indicates the rendering position of the second movable member 74 (for convenience, in this embodiment, referred to as the third rendering position). . The third effect position of "E" is the same position as the third initial action position in FIG. 61 described above. In the following, they are simply described as "D" and "E". Also, it is assumed that the operation in the moving process is the same as the initial operation mode in FIG. 61 . Further, (a) to (f) assume that the variable performance of the variable performance pattern 17 (see FIG. 27) is performed.

(a) is a state in which a normal ready-to-win effect is performed in the variable effect pattern 17, and it is notified that a loss has occurred as a result of the normal ready-to-win effect being performed. That is, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped at "565". At this time, the second movable member 74 is positioned at "D".

(b) is a state after a predetermined time (for example, 1S) has passed from (a), and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are still temporarily stopped at "565" respectively. Also, the second movable member 74 is swinging at the position "D", and at the same time, the sound effect "rattling" is output from the sound output device 9, and the second movable member 74 moves to "E" to reach normal reach. It is fueling the expectation of the players that the production will develop into the SPSP reach production (SPSP reach production development incitement).
In addition, in the variable performance pattern 17, after the loss is once reported in the normal ready-to-win performance, the second movable member 74 moves to "E" as shown in (c) because it is a variable performance pattern that develops into the SPSP ready-to-win performance. However, for example, in the variable performance pattern 5, since it is a variable performance pattern in which the variable performance ends with a normal reach performance (losing), although the SPSP reach performance development is encouraged, the second movable member 74 cannot be moved as a result. Instead, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as they are, resulting in a loss and ending the variable performance.

(c) shows the development effect in which the second movable member 74 moves to "E" (the second movable member rises) as a result of performing the SPSP ready-to-win effect development fanning. Specifically, the second movable member 74 moves from "D" to "E" over "0.8 S". Also, an effect image EF is displayed at a position (first image display device 70) corresponding to the periphery of the second movable member 74, and the special symbol TZ has started to be displayed in a variable manner.

(d) shows that the development production continues. Specifically, after the second movable member 74 moves to "E", the second movable portion (rotating body 74a) of the second movable member 74 starts rotating, and after rotating for a predetermined time (for example, 6S) stop spinning. That is, when the second movable member 74 moves to "E", it stops (stays) at "E" for "7S".

(e) shows a mode of "second movable member return to origin" (see FIG. 69 described later) after finishing the development effect. That is, after completing the stay for "7S" at "E", the second movable member 74 moves from "E" to "D" over "0.5S".

In (f), the second movable member 74 has completed the movement to “D”, and the title image of the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
It should be noted that, although the description using the drawings is omitted, the above-described rise notice effect also has the same effect operation mode as that shown in FIG. 62 .

In this way, when the second movable member 74 returns to the origin position after performing the development effect or the advance notice effect, the movement from "D" to "E" takes longer than the time required to move from "E" to "D". The relationship is such that time is longer.
In particular, the second movable member 74 has a predetermined amount of weight, and is a function that can move upward (in a direction against the vertical direction) from "D". By making the time required for the movement from "D" to "E" longer than the time required for the movement from "E" to "D", the drive source of the second movable member 74 is not loaded. It is possible to perform a performance action.
In addition, when comparing the time spent at "E", the time spent at "E" was the longest, followed by the time spent moving from "D" to "E", followed by "E". The relationship is such that it is the time it takes to move from to "D".
As a result, attention can be drawn to the rotating motion of the second movable portion (rotating body 74a) performed at "E", and the player's expectation for the award of the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, as shown by the comparison between the initial action mode and the effect action mode in FIG. 63, the transition time from "D" to "E" is "0.6 S" in the initial action mode, whereas the effect action mode is "0.6 S". is "0.8S", and the staying time at "E" is "5S" for the initial action mode and "7S" for the effect action mode, and from "E" to "D ” is 0.3 s for the initial motion mode and 0.5 s for the effect motion mode. in a relationship.
The reason for such a time relationship is roughly the same as the contents described in (a) to (c) of FIG. By doing so, it is also possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation for the awarding of the jackpot game.

Note that the required times shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
Also, the time relationships described in FIGS. 61 and 62 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the travel time from "D" to "E" and the travel time from "E" to "D" may be the same, or the travel time from "D" to "E" is longer than the travel time from "E" to "E". The travel time of "D" may be longer.
In addition, although the length of stay in "D" is the longest, it may be the shortest, or the length of stay in "D" may not be necessary.

(Regarding production button 17)
Although not shown, the effect button 17 can be moved from the origin position to a position corresponding to "large rise" shown in FIG.
It should be noted that "large rise" corresponds to "button thrust" shown in FIG. That is, in the effect operation, for example, in the "determined effect", it moves to a position corresponding to "large rise".
Here, in the initial operation of the effect button 17 (see FIG. 45), the movement time from the origin position to the position corresponding to "large rise" is, for example, "0.5S". On the other hand, the movement time from the position corresponding to "large rise" to the origin position is, for example, "3S". That is, in the initial operation of the effect button 17, the time required to move from the origin position to the operating position (position corresponding to "large rise") is longer than the time required to move from the operating position (position corresponding to "large rise") to the origin position. is shorter.
In addition, in the effect operation of the effect button 17, the movement time from the origin position to the position corresponding to "large rise" is, for example, "0.5S". On the other hand, the movement time from the position corresponding to "large rise" to the origin position (when the effect button 17 is not operated) is, for example, "3S". That is, in the production action of the production button 17, the movement time from the origin position to the operation position (position corresponding to "large rise") is longer than the movement time from the operation position (position corresponding to "large rise") to the origin position. is shorter.
By setting such a relationship, for example, the effect button 17 can be quickly moved to the operation position (operation position) in the "determined effect", and the variable effect (for example, , "Press!") until the performance button 17 becomes operable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a smooth presentation that does not stagnate.
Further, by returning from the position corresponding to the “large rise” to the origin position over time, it is possible to prevent the player's finger from being caught in the edge of the effect button 17, for example.

It should be noted that each required time for the initial operation and the effect operation of the effect button 17 is merely an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the movement time to return to the origin position may be shorter, or the movement time to the operating position (the position corresponding to "large rise") and the movement time to return to the origin position may be the same. may be
Also, the required time may be different between the initial action and the performance action.

(Comparison between effect button 17 and second movable member 74)
Here, it has been explained that the effect button 17 does not execute the initial operation when the return abnormality occurs in the effect button 17, but the "continuous vibration (2 seconds)" and the "intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are executed. (See Figure 49). That is, even if the return abnormality occurs, the initial operation of the additional element (vibration) of the effect button 17 can be executed.
On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 47, the second movable member 74 does not perform its initial operation when the second movable member 74 returns abnormally. The initial movement of the mechanical element (rotating body 74a) is also impracticable.
By configuring in this way, the effect button 17 can confirm the vibration mode even if the return abnormality occurs, and the second movable member 74 can prevent the rotating body 74a from breaking down.

(Concrete example of presentation operation mode of the first movable member at the time of jackpot notification)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, further details of the effect mode of the big win notification in the "determined effect" described in FIG. 60 will be described.

In the "determined effect", a effect button operation effective period is set from timing T1 to timing T2, and a button image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed on the first image display device 70 during this period.
In addition, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, the performance button 17 is pressed within the performance button operation valid period, or the performance button 17 is not pressed within the performance button operation valid period and the timing of T2 is reached. In addition, when either condition is established, the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C". On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process is a loss, the production button 17 is pressed within the production button operation valid period, or the production button 17 is not pressed within the production button operation valid period and the timing of T2 is reached. Also, even if either condition is satisfied, the first movable member 73 does not move from "A" to "C", and the first movable member 73 remains at "A".

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a case where the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot and the player has not pressed the effect button 17 within the effect button operation effective period.
Until the timing of T1, it is the SPSP reach fluctuation period, and the SPSP reach image is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At this time, the first movable member 73 is positioned at "A".

Then, when the timing of T1 is reached, it becomes a determined effect period, that is, the effect button operation valid period, and the first image display device 70 displays a button image imitating the effect button 17 and an image saying "Press!" be.
Then, when the player does not press the effect button 17 until the timing of T2, the jackpot notification period starts, and the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "1S". Also, an effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 at a position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 60).

Then, the first movable member 73 stays at "C" for "5S" and then moves from "C" to "A" for "2S" at timing T2-1.
Then, from the timing of T2-1, it becomes a temporary stop display (for example, 777 temporary stop display) of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ in the big hit notification period, and when it reaches the timing of T3, it becomes a fixed stop period, and the production pattern 70a and special Symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (for example, 777 is stopped and displayed).

On the other hand, FIG. 64(b) is a diagram for explaining a case where the determination result of the big win determination process is a big win and the player presses the effect button 17 at the timing of T1-1 of the effect button operation effective period. .
In this case, the timing of T1-1 is the jackpot notification period, and the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "C" over "1S". Also, an effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 at a position corresponding to the periphery of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 60).

Then, the first movable member 73 stays at "C" for "5S" and then moves from "C" to "A" for "2S" at timing T2-1.
Then, from the timing of T2-1, it becomes a temporary stop display (for example, 777 temporary stop display) of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ in the big hit notification period, and when it reaches the timing of T3, it becomes a fixed stop period, and the production pattern 70a and special Symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (for example, 777 is stopped and displayed).

That is, even if the player does not operate the effect button 17 or operates the effect button 17 during the effect button operation effective period, the timing of starting the movement of the first movable member 73 is changed. 1 The effect operation mode (operation, required time, etc.) of the movable member 73 does not change. That is, even if the effect button 17 is not operated and the first movable member 73 starts the effect operation at the latest timing (T2), the effect operation mode (operation, required time, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 60 is obtained.
As a result, the effect operation mode of the first movable member 73 does not have to be changed between when the effect button 17 is not operated and when the effect button 17 is operated, and the control load of the lamp/drive control unit 150 is eliminated. can be reduced.
Further, even if the first movable member 73 starts the performance operation at the latest timing (T2) without operating the performance button 17, part of the performance operation mode (operation, required time, etc.) of the first movable member 73 Alternatively, since the entire game is not omitted, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win from feeling unsatisfied.

(Modified example of required time for initial motion mode and required time for effect motion mode)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the required time for the initial action mode and the required time for the effect action mode.
Here, in FIG. 65, for the sake of convenience, the modified example will be described using the first movable member 73, but the same modified example may be applied to the second movable member 74 as well.

Since the initial operation mode (initial f) shown in FIG. 65 is shown in FIG. 59(f), description thereof will be omitted here.
On the other hand, in the effect operation mode, unlike FIG. 60(f), in the first movable member returning to origin of (f1), it moves from "C" to "C'" over "1S", and further, In the return to origin of the first movable member in (performance f2), it stops at "C'". tilt motion). It should be noted that the required time from the stop at "C'" to the completion of the effect motion (tilting motion) is "1.5 S". Furthermore, in the return to origin of the first movable member in (f4), the return to origin of the first movable member is completed by moving from "C'" to "A" over "1S".
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide more visual interest than simply returning the movable member to the origin, and to further improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 65, while the movement time from "C" to "A" in the initial action mode is "1.6 s", the total movement time from "C" to "A" in the effect action mode is It becomes "3.5S".
In this way, by making the motions in the movement process different between the initial motion mode and the performance motion mode, the movement time may be different as a result.
That is, in the examples of FIGS. 59 to 63, the initial action mode and the performance action mode are the same in the movement process, but the movement time is different, whereas in the example of FIG. The movement time differs between the initial movement mode and the effect movement mode because the movements in the movement process are different.
That is, the difference in movement time of each movable member in this embodiment includes both the examples of FIGS. 59 to 63 and the example of FIG.

(Modified example 1 of initial operation mode and effect operation mode)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing Modified Example 1 of the initial action mode and the effect action mode.
Here, in FIG. 66, for the sake of convenience, the modification will be described using the first movable member 73, but this modification may be applied to the second movable member 74 as well.

Since (first a) and (first c) shown in FIG. 66 show FIGS. 59(a) and (c), their description is omitted here.
Also, since (performance 1a) and (performance 1c) show FIGS. 60(a) and 60(c), their description is omitted here.
On the other hand, (performance 2a) shows the operation mode during execution of the above-described pseudo continuation. During this pseudo-continuous swing, the first movable member 73 moves from "A" to "B" over "0.3 S", and when returning to the origin, the first movable member 73 moves from "B" to " A” and “0.6S” to move.
In other words, the travel time of (First a) and (Performance 2a) are both "0.3 S", and the travel time of (First c) and (Performance 2c) are both "0.6 S", which is the same travel time, Comparing (initial a) and (performance 1a), (initial a) is "0.3 S", (performance 1a) is "0.5 S", and (initial c) is "0.3 S". 6S", whereas (performance 1b) is "0.8S", so the movement time is different.
In other words, even when moving to the same position, the movement time may or may not be the same as the movement time in the initial action mode, depending on the type of presentation.
As a result, when the performance motion is performed, even if the player moves to the same position, the motion takes a plurality of moving times.
In addition, the travel time of (First a) and (Performance 2a) are both "0.3 S", and the travel time of (First c) and (Performance 2c) are both "0.6 S", which is the same travel time, so It is possible to use common performance data (driving-related performance data) for the initial motion mode and the performance motion mode. This makes it possible to reduce production data (production data related to driving).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, both the same and different initial operation modes and effect operation modes may be provided, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided with only one, or may be provided with only those in which the initial action mode and the performance action mode are different.

(Modified example 2 of the initial action mode and effect action mode)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing Modified Example 2 of the initial action mode and the effect action mode.
It should be noted that FIG. 67 shows a modification of a movable member, such as the second movable member 74, having a second movable portion (rotating body 74a).

(first a), (first b), and (first c) shown in FIG. 67 are the same as those shown in FIGS.
On the other hand, (action c'), (action d'), and (action e') differ from FIGS. 62(c), (d), and (e) in the following points. That is, in FIG. 62(e), the second movable portion (rotating body 74a) of the second movable member 74 is rotated at "E" for "6S", and after the rotation is stopped at "E" (staying time is "7S") and moved to "D".
On the other hand, in FIG. 67 (act e'), the movement to "D" is started when "5S" has passed since the second movable portion (rotating body 74a) started to rotate. In this case, the stay time at "E" is also shorter than in FIG.
When the effect operation mode is configured in this way, unlike the initial operation mode, the second movable part (rotating body 74a) continues to rotate from beginning to end, so that it is difficult for the player to feel that the effect is interrupted. , it is possible to further improve the performance interest.

It should be noted that, like the second movable member 74, a movable member that has a second movable portion (rotating body 74a) and whose movement is more complicated than that of the first movable member 73 is, for example, one part of the initial movement in the initial movement. The operation of the part may be omitted (the operation mode may be different between the initial operation and the performance operation). For example, in the initial operation, the second movable portion (rotating body 74a) may not be rotated, or the rotation time may be shortened. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial motion while maintaining the performance interest. On the other hand, the first movable member 73, whose motion is not complicated compared to the second movable member 74, may perform the same motion in the initial motion and the performance motion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an accurate operation in accordance with the operation mode of each movable member.
On the other hand, the initial motion of a movable member whose motion becomes complicated may be performed without omission, and the initial motion of a movable member whose motion is not complicated may be partially or entirely omitted.

(Comparison of the first movable member and the second movable member in the performance scene)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a comparison of the performance scenes of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. FIG.

As described above, the first movable member 73 is a movable member that can be operated in the scene of the announcement and the announcement of the big win, such as when the announcement of the swing announcement and the announcement of the big win of the determined performance are made. On the other hand, the second movable member 74 is a movable member that can be operated in advance notice scenes, such as development effects and rising notice effects, but cannot be operated in big win notification scenes.

Here, the relationship between the scene in which each movable member is operated and the movement time of each movable member will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 68 (performance 1a) and (performance 1b), in the scene of the jackpot notification in which the first movable member 73 is operated, the movement time from "A" to "C" is "1S" as described above. and the travel time from "C" to "A" is "2S". That is, the time required for return to origin is longer.
The reason for doing this is to make the player immerse himself in the afterglow of the big win, as described above. As shown, the first image display device 70 does not perform a jackpot announcement effect or the like, and the special symbol TZ is also visible. At 70, no information important to the player is displayed.
Therefore, even if the first movable member 73 is returned to the origin position over time, the first movable member 73 does not interfere with the display contents of the first image display device 70 . be done.
From this aspect as well, the first movable member 73 takes longer to return to the origin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68 (Dedication 2a) to (Dedication 2d), in the advance notice of the actuation of the second movable member 74, as described above, the moving time from "D" to "E" is " 0.8 S", and the travel time from "E" to "D" is "0.5 S". That is, the time required to move to the effect position is longer.
The reason for doing this is to prevent a load from being applied to the drive source of the second movable member 74, as described above. At the timing of execution, other jackpot announcement performances are sometimes executed at the same time, and the other jackpot announcement performances being executed are prevented from becoming difficult to see due to the rise announcement performance of the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (De 2a), a dialog preview image SY is displayed in the operating range of the second movable member 74 of the first image display device 70 . It should be noted that, in the dialogue preview, multiple lines may be connected to form a sentence (for example, the dialogue "This fluctuation is ..." and the dialogue "Hot!" The image SY may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10S). More specifically, the line "This change is..." is displayed for 5 seconds, then the line "This change is..." is erased, and the line "Hot!" is displayed for 5 seconds. It's like

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2b), while the dialog preview image SY is being displayed, the second movable member 74 performs an ascending preview effect, and the dialog preview image SY moves to "E". The second movable member 74 and the effect image EF displayed at a position corresponding to the circumference of the second movable member 74 make it difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2c), when the advance notice effect by the second movable member 74 ends, the effect image EF is erased, and the second movable member 74 returns to the origin, so that the first image The dialog preview image SY displayed on the display device 70 becomes visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (performance 2d), the second level "hot!" of the dialog preview image SY becomes visible.
That is, if the second movable member 74 is returned to the origin position over a long period of time at the stage of the notice, the player will hear the second stage "Hot!" of the dialogue notice image SY shown in FIG. There is concern that it may not be visible.
Therefore, in order to eliminate such concern, the second movable member 74 is quickly returned to the origin.
From this aspect as well, the second movable member 74 takes longer to move to the effect position.

(Comparison between the initial motion and the performance motion of each movable member of the board accessory)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a comparison between the initial motion and the performance motion of each movable member of the board accessory.
Specifically, it shows a comparison between the initial motion pattern 1 in FIG. 44 and the performance motion of the first movable member 73, and a comparison between the initial motion pattern 1 in FIG. Note that the initial operation pattern 1 is partially omitted for the sake of convenience.

The performance action using the first movable member 73 includes, as described above, the "pseudo continuation", the "swing notice", and the "jackpot announcement".
Of these, "pseudo continuous swing" and "oscillation notice" perform "first movable member small descent" and "first movable member return to origin", and the first movable member LED alternately lights up in red and white. (lights up).
In addition, the "jackpot announcement" performs "large descent of the first movable member" and "return to the first movable member origin", and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in a rainbow.
That is, compared with the initial operation pattern 1,
There is no production motion that performs all of the initial motion pattern 1 in a series (including the initial motion of the second movable member 74).
Further, the initial operation related to the first movable member 73 in the initial operation pattern 1, that is, "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", "first 1 movable member return to origin" is not performed all in a series.
In addition, there is no production motion using the same lighting color as the lighting color of the first movable member LED in the initial motion pattern 1 .
It can be said that
That is, the initial motion related to the first movable member 73 in the initial motion pattern 1, "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", "first movable member It consists only of the performance action that performs a part of "member return to origin".
As a result, operations other than the operations performed in the initial operation pattern 1 are not performed as performance operations, so that it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance operations are performed without problems by confirming the initial operations.
In addition, in any effect operation, the first movable member LED is lit (lighted) in a color different from the lighting color of the first movable member LED in the initial operation pattern 1, so that the initial operation and the effect operation can be easily distinguished.

It should be noted that there may be an effect operation in which all of the "first movable member small descent", "first movable member return to origin", "first movable member large descent", and "first movable member return to origin" are performed.

As described above, the effect operation using the second movable member 74 includes the “advanced effect” and the “rising advance notice effect”.
"Development effect" and "rising notice effect" both perform "rising of the second movable member", "rotation of the second movable part → stop", and "return to origin of the second movable member", and the first movable member LED The "development effect" lights up (lights up) in green, and the "rising notice effect" lights up (lights up) in red.
That is, compared with the initial operation pattern 1,
There is no production motion that performs all of the initial motion pattern 1 in series (including the initial motion of the first movable member 73).
In addition, there is no presentation motion that executes part of the initial motion related to the second movable member 74 in the initial motion pattern 1 .
In addition, there is no production motion using the same lighting color as the lighting color of the second movable member LED in the initial motion pattern 1 .
It can be said that
In other words, the initial motion related to the second movable member 74 in the initial motion pattern 1, "second movable member rise", "second movable member rotation→stop", and "second movable member return to origin" are all performed. consists of only
As a result, operations other than the operations performed in the initial operation pattern 1 are not performed as performance operations, so that it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance operations are performed without problems by confirming the initial operations.
Also, in any effect operation, the second movable member LED lights (lights up) in a color different from the lighting color of the second movable member LED in the initial operation pattern 1, so that it is easy to distinguish between the initial operation and the effect operation.

It should be noted that there may be an effect operation in which a part of "rise of the second movable member", "rotation of the second movable part→stop", and "return to the origin of the second movable member" is performed. For example, there may be effects such as "raising the second movable member" and "returning the second movable member to the origin".

(Comparison between initial motion and performance motion of movable member of frame role)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a comparison between the initial motion and the performance motion of the movable member of the frame accessory.
Specifically, it shows a comparison between the initial motion pattern 1 in FIG. 45 and the effect motion of the third movable member (the effect button 17).

The production operation using the third movable member (production button 17) is, for example, the case of performing the “big hit” and “button hitting” as in the variable production pattern 42, or the “button vibration” as in the fluctuation production pattern 17, for example. A case where a jackpot announcement production such as " is performed.
Of these, in the variable performance pattern typified by the variable performance pattern 42, "performance button large rise & continuous vibration (5 seconds)", "performance button return to origin", and "effect button intermittent vibration (5 seconds)" are performed. , the effect button LED alternately lights up (lights up) in red and white.
In addition, in the variable production pattern represented by the variable production pattern 17, "production button continuous vibration (1 second)" is performed, and the production button LED lights up (lights up) in white.
That is, compared with the initial operation pattern 1,
In the variable effect pattern represented by the variable effect pattern 42, the process itself of "production button large rise & continuous vibration", "production button return to origin", and "production button intermittent vibration" is the same, but the vibrating time is different. differ.
Further, in the variable effect pattern represented by the variable effect pattern 17, none of the steps are the same, and only the continuous vibration of the effect button 17 is common to the initial operation pattern 1.
It can be said that
As a result, operations other than the operations performed in the initial operation pattern 1 are not performed as performance operations, so that it is possible to confirm whether a plurality of types of performance operations are performed without problems by confirming the initial operations.
Also, in any effect operation, the light emission mode is different from the lighting color of the effect button LED in the initial operation pattern 1, so it is easy to distinguish between the initial operation and the effect operation.

It should be noted that there may be an effect operation in which all of "effect button large rise & continuous vibration (2 seconds)", "effect button return to origin", and "effect button intermittent vibration (2 seconds)" are performed.

(Modified example of board accessory initial motion pattern related to production motion)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modification of the board accessory initial motion pattern related to the performance motion.

As described with reference to FIG. 68, the first movable member 73 is a movable member that can be operated in the scene of the announcement and the announcement of the big win, such as when the announcement of the swinging announcement and the announcement of the big win of the determined performance are made. On the other hand, the second movable member 74 is a movable member that can be operated in advance notice scenes, such as development effects and rising notice effects, but cannot be operated in big win notification scenes.
In this modification, as shown in (b), the initial operation of the first movable member 73, which is activated upon notification of the big win, is performed at the end of the initial operation process.
That is, in the initial operation pattern 1 according to this modified example, the initial operation process for the second movable member 74 is performed first, and then the initial operation process for the first movable member 73 is performed.

In particular, the movable members that operate when a big win is announced tend to be large in size, have a large operating range, have a large number of movable members to operate, and take a long time to operate. Therefore, it can be said that some kind of operation trouble is likely to occur.
If such a movable member is performed in the first half of the initial operation process, if some kind of operation trouble occurs, it is possible to shift to the initial operation process of another movable member (for example, a movable member that has a small operation range and is unlikely to cause an operation trouble). Otherwise, the initial operation process may be delayed.
On the other hand, by configuring as shown in FIG. 71, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the initial operation process is delayed.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes are described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R101C, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R101C, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R101D, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R101D, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R102, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 72, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. . By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to reduce the processing load associated with the operation.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 72, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power supply restoration designation command), the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. By doing so, the main control board 110 did not start up normally, and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality related to the power supply line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred. It is possible to grasp that

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to red. and white alternately.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality, and the effect button LED lights up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the lighting mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately turn on red and white. However, since the initial operation process has ended this time, the first movable member LED and the production button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately turn on red and white. However, since the initial operation process has ended this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to red. and white alternately.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit (lighted) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission. do.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. At the same time, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up (lights up) in white.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. .

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality, and the effect button LED lights up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternate between red and white. Since the initial operation process has been completed this time, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting (white lighting).

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights (lights up) in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up in white (lights up). However, since the initial operation process has ended this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the lighting mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. Then, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up (lights up) in white.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in red→green→blue as initial light emission. lights up (lights up) in that order.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a second power supply restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED emit light. The mode changes and goes out.
At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in red→green→blue as initial light emission. lights up (lights up) in that order.

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the pending number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect design designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the performance design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

A specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on is the same as the above-described specific example of a case where the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received.

(Concrete example when power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 83 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. is a diagram showing a specific example of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED maintains lighting during customer waiting without performing initial light emission, and the image The display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 , an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance, jackpot variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot game (opening, round game, ending ), even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of ), the image display is not performed until the power-on designation command as the power-on command is received at the timing of T4. Except for the fact that the screen displayed on the device is a variable production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen) or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen), during the customer waiting state This is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

Also, when there is an abnormality in various roles, the initial actions of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are already finished, the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" when the power is restored. A second standby screen in which the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect The button LED is illuminated while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 ( Sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) is also displayed Maintain content.

Then, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a command at the time of power ON transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin position of the production button 17 return operation to is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED maintains light emission during customer waiting without initial light emission, and the image On the display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is completed. Initial action processing is started, and initial actions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Then, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. .

In addition, during the execution of the variable effect (losing variable effect, jackpot variable effect) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, that is, the variable effect screen on the image display device is displayed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, and then the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed. When the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation are executed. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game" instead of the variable effect screen, and the returning screen is displayed until the next special symbol confirmation command is received. to maintain

In addition, power supply to the main control board 110 (backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the return operation of various characters and the initial operation are executed. . At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance screen in place of the normal jackpot performance screen, and maintains the display of the special jackpot performance screen until the next round designation command or ending designation command is received. . The display of the special big win effect screen may be maintained until the big win game ends.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device after restoration to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory After recovery to The display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display during recovery) is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the suspension display is not executed in the suspension icon display area while the specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed on the image display device, but the suspension display can be performed in the sub suspension display. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) special symbols after the game control state is restored. Even if the variable display is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display (blinking display) is not performed during the variable display of the special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84) displays the returning screen on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may be made to display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as when the game is restarted, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), light emission of various roles Parts (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as when the game is started, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are sub-reserved display devices (sub-first reservation display device 83, sub-reservation display device 83). 2. The initial operation is performed before the pending display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device). By doing so, it becomes easier to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) is held for the frame accessory (production button 17). The initial operation is performed before the display state showing the number is displayed (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device). By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, and Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), , when receiving a special symbol memory specifying command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port from the main control board 110, the winning sound is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the main When a variation start command is received from the control board 110, the variation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even during the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board When a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply to 110, the return operation of various characters and the initial operation are performed again. (initial light emission) is executed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, during the return action of various roles, and after the initial action (including initial light emission) is completed, during the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production) Even so, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, various accessories return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, even during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, When a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When the power supply is restarted from the main control board 110 after the power supply is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 73 to 83, power supply to the main control board 110 is continued even after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the power is turned on again from the main control board 110. When the input designation command is received, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

It should be noted that only when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state (during the display of the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed, during the display of the customer waiting demo effect screen). However, when receiving a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command from the main control board 110 during a fluctuation performance (losing fluctuation performance, jackpot variation performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Also, it is better to display the standby screen without displaying the initial screen.

In addition, even during a variable performance (losing variable performance, jackpot variable performance) or a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the main control board 110 When a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after stopping only the power supply of the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

<Regarding Other Inventions, etc. Described in the Above Embodiments>
Other inventions and the like described in the present embodiment will be described below.

In a conventional game machine, various effects are provided on the game board, and the effects are used to enhance the interest in the game. And, as such a directing means, there is a movable directing means (so-called gimmick), and the movable directing means (so-called gimmick) is operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, see JP 2013-236681 A ). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has room for improvement in terms of accurately activating the movable effect means.

(a) As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode, and a power supply Initialization processing means (for example, main CPU 110a for initializing the main control board) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game, or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply After the start of the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B, for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the second initial and a control means (for example, a lamp/drive control section 150) capable of performing an operation between the operating position C and the initial position (for example, the origin position A ) to a specific operating position (e.g., first initial operating position B, e.g., second initial operating position C) (e.g., moving time from origin position A to first initial operating position B is 0.3 S , for example, the movement time from the origin position A to the second initial action position C is 0.8 S), the time for moving the movable effect means from the specific action position to the initial position (for example, the first initial action position The movement time from B to the origin position A is 0.6 S, for example, the movement time from the second initial operation position C to the origin position A is 1.6 S) is longer (for example, 0.3 S<0.6 S, For example, 0.8S<1.6S).
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(b) As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) operable in a predetermined manner and During the execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the performance operation of the movable presentation means (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the first presentation position B, for example, the first movable a control means (e.g., lamp/driving control unit 150) capable of moving the member 73 between the origin position A and the second effect position C), and in the effect operation, the movable effect means from the initial position (for example, the origin position A) to a specific operating position (for example, the first effect position B, for example, the second effect position C) (for example, the time from the origin position A to the first effect position B The movement time is 0.5 S, for example, the movement time from the origin position A to the second production position C is 1 S), the time for moving the movable production means from the specific operation position to the initial position (for example, the first The movement time from the effect position B to the origin position A is 0.8S, for example, the movement time from the second effect position C to the origin position A is 2S) is longer (for example, 0.5S<0.8S, for example , 1S<2S).
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(c) As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the second movable member 74) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, power supply Initialization processing means (for example, main CPU 110a for initializing the main control board) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game, or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply After the start of the control means (for example, lamp/drive control section 150), and in the initial motion, the time (eg, 0 .6S), the time (for example, 0.3S) for moving the movable effect means from the specific operating position to the initial position is shorter (for example, there is a relationship of 0.6S>0.3S); It is characterized by
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(d) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the second movable member 74) operable in a predetermined manner and During execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), it is possible to perform the production operation of the movable production means (for example, move the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third production position E). and a control means (for example, lamp/drive control unit 150), and in the production operation, the movable production means is moved from an initial position (for example, origin position D) to a specific operation position (for example, third production position E ) is shorter (eg, 0.8 S) than the time (eg, 0.8 S) to operate the movable effect means from the specific operating position to the initial position (eg, 0.8 S> 0.5S relationship).
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(e) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and initial processing means (for example, the main control board initial setting process that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped) CPU 110a), and the initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (for example, the first movable member 73 operates between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 moves to the origin between the position D and the third initial operation position E), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the production operation of the movable production means (for example, the first movable member 73 is Control means (for example, lamp / drive control unit 150), and in the initial operation, the movable effect means is set to the initial position (for example, the origin position A in the case of the first movable member 73, the origin position D in the case of the second movable member 74, for example) ) to a specific operating position (for example, the second effect position C for the first movable member 73, for example, the third effect position E for the second movable member 74) (for example, the first movable member 73, 0.8 S, for example, 0.6 S for the second movable member 74), and the time for moving the movable effect means from the initial position to the specific action position in the effect action (e.g., the second 1 S for the first movable member 73, for example, 0.8 S for the second movable member 74) is a different time (for example, 0.8 S≠1 S for the first movable member 73, for example, the second movable member 73). In the case of the member 74, the relationship is 0.6S≠0.8S).
As a result, for example, the initial action is operated in a shorter time than the effect action, thereby shortening the time related to the initial action, and the effect action is operated in a longer time than the initial action. It is possible to prevent the player from being late in noticing that the performance using the movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is being executed. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(f) As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, power supply Initialization processing means (for example, main CPU 110a for initializing the main control board) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game, or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply , the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, moving the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B) is performed, and the game is being executed (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display control means (for example, lamp/driving control section 150), and a time (eg, 0.00) for moving the movable effect means from an initial position (eg, origin position A) to a specific motion position (eg, first initial motion position B) in the initial motion. 3S), and a time (for example, 0.3S) for moving the movable effect means from the initial position (for example, origin position A) to the specific action position (for example, first effect position B) in the effect action. , have the same time (for example, both are 0.3 S).
As a result, common drive data can be used for the initial action and the effect action, and the drive data can be reduced. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(g) As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, for example, the second Movable member 74) and initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped) the main CPU 110a), and the initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the production operation of the movable production means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second effect position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third effect position E). , lamp/driving control unit 150), and in the initial operation, move the movable effect means to a specific operation position (for example, if the first movable member 73 is the second effect position C, for example, the second movable member 74 If so, the time to operate from the initial position (for example, the origin position A for the first movable member 73, the origin position D for the second movable member 74) (for example, the first 1.6 S for the movable member 73, for example, 0.3 S for the second movable member 74), and the time for moving the movable effect means from the specific operation position to the initial position in the effect operation (for example, , 2S for the first movable member 73, for example, 0.5S for the second movable member 74) are different times (for example, 1.6S≠2S for the first movable member 73, for example, the second 2 movable member 74, the relationship is 0.3S≠0.5S).
As a result, for example, the initial action is operated in a shorter time than the effect action, thereby shortening the time related to the initial action, and the effect action is operated in a longer time than the initial action. It is possible to prevent the player from being late in noticing that the performance using the movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is being executed. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(h) As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) operable in a predetermined manner, and a power supply Initialization processing means (for example, main CPU 110a for initializing the main control board) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the game, or restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply , the initial operation of the movable effect means (for example, moving the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the first initial operation position B) is performed, and the game is being executed (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display control means (for example, lamp/driving control section 150), and a time (eg, 0.00) for moving the movable effect means from a specific motion position (eg, first initial motion position B) to an initial position (eg, origin position A) in the initial motion. 6S), and a time (for example, 0.6S) for moving the movable effect means from the specific operation position (for example, the first effect position B) to the initial position (for example, the origin position A) in the effect action. , have the same time (for example, both are 0.6 S).
As a result, common drive data can be used for the initial action and the effect action, and the drive data can be reduced. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(i) As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73) operable in a predetermined mode and a During the execution (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), it is possible to perform the production operation of the movable production means (for example, move the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second production position C). and a control means (e.g., lamp/driving control unit 150), and a special game (e.g., jackpot game, e.g., high-probability game state) advantageous to the player is given to the effect operation. Including a notification effect operation to notify (for example, a large descent in the jackpot notification), the notification effect operation moves the movable effect means from the initial position (for example, the origin position A) to a specific operation position (for example, the second effect position C ) is longer than the time (for example, 1S) to operate the movable effect means from the specific operation position to the initial position (for example, 1S<2S). , characterized in that
As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for having won the big prize, and to make the player immerse himself in the afterglow of having won the big prize. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(j) As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (e.g., the first movable member 73, e.g., the second Movable member 74) and initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped) the main CPU 110a), and the initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the production operation of the movable production means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second effect position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third effect position E). , lamp/drive control unit 150), and in the initial operation and the production operation, the movable production means is set to the initial position (for example, the origin position A in the case of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74 from the origin position D) to a specific motion position (for example, the second initial motion position C and the second rendering position C for the first movable member 73; for example, the third initial motion position C for the second movable member 74). It is possible to operate to the operating position E and the third effect position E) and to stay at the specific operating position, and the time for which the movable effect means stays at the specific operating position in the initial operation (for example, the third 2S for the first movable member 73, for example, 5S for the second movable member 74), the time for which the movable effect means stays at the specific action position in the effect action (for example, the first movable member 73 5S, for example, 7S for the second movable member 74) is longer (for example, 2S<5S for the first movable member 73, and for example, 7S for the second movable member 74). 5S<7S).
As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction for having won the big prize, and to make the player immerse himself in the afterglow of having won the big prize. As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately.

(k) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (e.g., the first movable member 73, e.g., the second Movable member 74) and initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped) the main CPU 110a), and the initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E); Effecting means (for example, first movable member 73) and second movable effecting means (for example, second movable member 74) different from the first movable effecting means, said first movable effecting means is longer than the time (for example, 0.8 s) for moving from the first initial position (for example, the origin position A) to the first operating position (for example, the second initial operating position C). from the operation position to the first initial position (for example, 1.6 S) is longer (for example, there is a relationship of 0.8 S<1.6 S), and the second movable effect means has the above-mentioned The initial operation is performed from a second operation position (for example, a third initial operation position E) to a second initial position (for example, an origin position D) for a period of time (for example, 0.3 s) longer than the second initial operation. It is characterized in that the operation time (for example, 0.6S) from the position to the second operation position is longer (for example, there is a relationship of 0.3S<0.6S).
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(l) As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, for example, the second movable member 74), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the effect operation of the movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73 is moved between the origin position A and the second effect position C (for example, the second movable member 74 is operated between the origin position D and the third effect position E). The movable effect means includes first movable effect means (eg, first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (eg, second movable member 74) different from the first movable effect means. Including, the effect action of the first movable effect means is a time (e.g., 1S ) from the first action position to the first initial position (for example, 2S) is longer (for example, there is a relationship of 1S<2S), and the second movable effect means has the above-mentioned The rendering operation is performed from a second operation position (eg, third rendering position E) to a second initial position (eg, origin position D) for a period of time (eg, 0.5 s) before the second initial position. to the second operating position (for example, 0.8 S) is longer (for example, 0.5 S<0.8 S).
As a result, the movable effect means can be operated accurately without applying a load to the drive source.

(m) As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, movable effect means (for example, the first movable member 73, for example, the second Movable member 74) and initial processing means (for example, main control board initialization processing that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped) the main CPU 110a), and the initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started (for example, the first movable member 73 is operated between the origin position A and the second initial operation position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third initial operation position E), and during the execution of the game (for example, from the start of fluctuation to the stop display), the production operation of the movable production means (for example, the first movable member 73 between the origin position A and the second effect position C, for example, the second movable member 74 between the origin position D and the third effect position E). , lamp/driving control unit 150), and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (for example, a first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means different from the first movable effect means. effecting means (for example, the second movable member 74), and the first movable effecting means performs the same action (for example, the first movable member 73 at the origin position A and the 2) the motion performed between the initial motion position C and the motion performed between the origin position A and the second effect position C are the same motions), and the second movable The rendering means performs different operations between the initial motion and the rendering motion (for example, the second movable member 74 moves to the origin position D after stopping the rotation of the rotating body 74a at the third rendering position E in the initial motion). However, in the performance operation, the rotation of the rotating body 74a is not stopped at the third performance position E, but is moved to the origin position D while being rotated.
As a result, for example, in the second movable member 74 whose motion is more complicated than that of the first movable member 73, a part of the performance motion can be omitted in the initial motion. The time required for operation can be shortened. In addition, it is possible to execute an accurate action in accordance with the action mode of each movable effect means.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is assumed to shift to a high-probability game state over a predetermined number of times after all the jackpot games are completed, but the inside of the big winning opening 50 opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of a big winning game when a game ball passes through a specific area provided in the .

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, it is shifted to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the specific pattern, the next game is played after the end of the jackpot game. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol may be given priority. may be executed by

Incidentally, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 17 presentation button 73 first movable member 74 second movable member 110 main control board 110a main CPU
130 production control board 130a sub CPU
150 lamp/drive control unit 150a lamp CPU

Claims (1)

A main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal from the main control means, and a plurality of movable effect means having different operation modes. In a game machine equipped with
The main control means is
It is possible to transmit a predetermined signal based on the start of power supply,
The production control means is
It is possible to perform control to perform initial actions of the plurality of movable effect means based on the reception of the predetermined signal, and control to perform effect actions of the plurality of movable effect means during execution of the game,
A specific movable effect means among the plurality of movable effect means is
As the effect operation, it is possible to execute a notification effect operation for notifying that a special game advantageous to the player is awarded,
The notification effect operation has a longer time to operate from the specific operating position to the initial position than the time to operate from the initial position to the specific operating position,
In the initial operation, while sequentially operating the plurality of movable effect means,
Operate the specific movable effect means at the end of the initial operation ,
It is possible to display a game standby screen in which a plurality of performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination on predetermined display means in a standby state in which the game is not progressing,
While the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display of the game standby screen, if the power supply to the effect control means is continued, it is possible to continue the display of the game standby screen ,
When the effect control means receives the predetermined signal while continuing to display the game standby screen,
Capable of performing the initial operation,
It is possible to display the plurality of effect symbols of a specific combination different from the predetermined combination on the game standby screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images